Printronix T5204R User`s manual

R
User’s Manual
T5000 Thermal Printer
Software License Agreement
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES
YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN
MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY
WILL BE REFUNDED.
Definitions.
"Software" shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and
program. The term "Software Product" includes the Software resident in the
printer and its documentation. The Software Product is licensed (not sold) to
you, and Printronix, Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own,
all copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the Software
Product.
License.
1. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the
Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes.
2. Restrictions.
a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc., you agree to
maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information
concerning the typefaces in strict confidence.
b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product.
c.
You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any
portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the
prior written consent of Printronix, Inc.
d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software
Product.
e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by
telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the Software.
f.
You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent
and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized
disclosure or use.
3. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only
if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the
Software Product and printer.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software
will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors
and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection
with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the
same version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software
will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to
make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any
time.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST
PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED
BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this
Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this
Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated
by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail
to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected
within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall
return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Communication Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement: This equipment
has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provided reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement: This
Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communcations du
Canada: Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform á norme NMB003 du Canada.
European Community (EC) Conformity Statement:
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Printronix cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting
from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of
non-Printronix option cards.
German Conformity Statement:
Zulassungsbescheinigung Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Geraten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen das EGKonformitätszelchen - CE - zu führen.
Der Außteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die Printronix......(1)
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und
EN 55022 Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte bedürfen folgender Hinweise:
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht asreichend
entstört sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters für
Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und
Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn
keine elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem
EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach
Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung
(Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.
EN 55022: Dieses ist eine Kategorie A Vorrichtung. Betrieb in den
Wohnbereichen kann elektrische Störung verursachen. Es ist die
Verantwortlichkeit des Benutzers, passende Gegenmaßnahmen zu ergreifen.
EN 55024: Begrenzung Werte für Gebrauch in bevölkerten Bereiche,
kommerziellen und Industriegebieten sind innen Übereinstimmung mit den
spezifizierten Anforderungen Hinsichtlich Störfreiheit.
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte,
wie in den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication equipment.
Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Trademark Acknowledgements
Printronix, IGP, IGP/Auto Label Mapping, LinePrinter Plus, PGL, and PrintNet
are registered trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
ThermaLine is a trademark of Printronix.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Code V is a trademark of QMS, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers, Inc.
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association.
Copyright 2002, Printronix, Inc.
750926-001G
IMPORTANT WARRANTY INFORMATION
PRINTER WARRANTY
Printronix® warrants to purchaser that under normal use and service, this
printer (excluding the thermal printhead) purchased hereunder shall be free
from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days
from the date of shipment from Printronix.
Consumable items such as media and ribbons are not covered under this
warranty. This warranty does not cover equipment or parts that have been
misused, altered, or used for purposes other than those for which they were
manufactured. This warranty also does not cover loss, shipping damage,
damage resulting from accident or damages resulting from unauthorized
service.
THERMAL PRINTHEAD
Printronix warrants the printhead for a period of one hundred eighty (180)
days, or 1,000,000 linear inches for Direct Thermal use, or 2,000,000 linear
inches for Thermal Transfer use, whichever comes first. The warranty does
not cover printheads that have been misused, damaged due to improper
cleaning, or damaged due to use of improper ribbons or media.
SUPPLIES
For the number of the nearest Printronix full-service distributor that carries
Printronix genuine supplies, please call 1-800-733-1900 or fax
(714)-368-2354. Supplies design, specification, and selection are critical and
integral to the development of any computer imaging system. Printronix's
extensive manufacturing and research capabilities, along with years of
experience in the design of printers and their applications, assures that you
will receive the exact materials that you require to maximize the performance
of your Printronix printer. Further information can be obtained by calling the
Printronix Customer Solutions Center at (714) 368-2686 or from the Printronix
Web page at http://www.printronix.com.
ON-SITE MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Printronix offers on-site support services in the United States. Please contact
the Printronix Maintenance Contracts Group at (714) 368-2798 for detailed
service agreement information.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction......................................................... 17
Printronix Customer Solutions Center ................................................. 17
Training Available On Printronix Products ........................................... 17
Warnings And Special Information ...................................................... 18
Manual Conventions ............................................................................ 18
The T5000 Series Label Printer........................................................... 19
Standard Features ........................................................................ 19
Optional Features.......................................................................... 20
Thermal Printer Technology ................................................................ 22
The Printing Process ..................................................................... 22
Dynamic Print Control ................................................................... 22
Thermal Consumables......................................................................... 23
Media Selection............................................................................. 23
Ribbons ......................................................................................... 23
Setting Up The Printer ......................................................................... 24
Unpacking The Printer .................................................................. 24
Installation ..................................................................................... 26
2 Operation............................................................ 29
Controls And Indicators ....................................................................... 29
Power Switch ................................................................................ 29
Control Panel ................................................................................ 29
Powering On The Printer............................................................... 33
Operating Modes........................................................................... 33
Media Handling Modes ........................................................................ 33
Loading Media And Ribbon ................................................................. 34
Loading Roll Media ....................................................................... 35
Loading Fanfold Media.................................................................. 41
Loading Ribbon ............................................................................. 45
Removing The Media Guide.......................................................... 48
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder................................................. 49
Batch Rewind Mode ...................................................................... 49
Label Peel-Off ............................................................................... 55
Table of Contents
Printing Adjustments............................................................................ 59
Printhead Pressure Adjustment .................................................... 59
Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments ......................................... 60
Positioning The Media Sensor ...................................................... 61
Sensing Different Media Types ..................................................... 62
Running Auto Calibrate ................................................................. 63
Running Media Profile................................................................... 64
Running Manual Calibrate............................................................. 66
Cleaning............................................................................................... 67
General Cleaning .......................................................................... 67
Printhead Cleaning........................................................................ 67
3 Configuring The Printer....................................... 69
Overview.............................................................................................. 69
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters ..................................... 69
Moving Within The Configuration Menu ........................................ 70
Selecting A Menu Option .............................................................. 71
Changing Printer Settings ............................................................. 71
Saving A Configuration ................................................................. 72
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration ........................................... 73
Modifying A Saved Configuration .................................................. 74
Printing A Configuration ................................................................ 75
Menu Overview.................................................................................... 78
Main Menu ........................................................................................... 79
VALIDATOR ........................................................................................ 84
VALIDATOR Submenus................................................................ 86
CONFIG. CONTROL ........................................................................... 91
CONFIG. CONTROL Submenus .................................................. 92
MEDIA CONTROL............................................................................... 94
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus ...................................................... 96
CALIBRATE CTRL ............................................................................ 108
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus.................................................... 109
PRINTER CONTROL ........................................................................ 114
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus................................................ 116
EMULATIONS ................................................................................... 124
Overview ..................................................................................... 124
COAX SETUP.................................................................................... 128
TWINAX SETUP................................................................................ 131
SPC COAX SETUP ........................................................................... 134
SPC TWINAX SETUP ....................................................................... 135
IPDS SETUP ..................................................................................... 136
TN5250 SETUP ................................................................................. 138
Table of Contents
IGP/PGL SETUP ............................................................................... 140
IGP/VGL SETUP ............................................................................... 142
P-SERIES SETUP ............................................................................. 145
P-SER XQ SETUP............................................................................. 148
SER MATRIX SETUP........................................................................ 150
PROPRINTER SETUP ...................................................................... 152
EPSON FX SETUP............................................................................ 154
Emulation Submenus......................................................................... 156
DIAGNOSTICS .................................................................................. 200
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus ......................................................... 201
PARALLEL PORT.............................................................................. 204
PARALLEL PORT Submenus ..................................................... 205
SERIAL PORT ................................................................................... 208
SERIAL PORT Submenus .......................................................... 209
C/T PORT .......................................................................................... 216
C/T PORT Submenus ................................................................. 216
ETHERNET PARAMS ....................................................................... 218
ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus............................................... 220
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software ................ 223
Flash Memory ............................................................................. 223
Downloading Software Through The
Serial Or Parallel Port.................................................................. 224
Downloading Software Through The
Network Interface Card (NIC)...................................................... 227
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory ................... 229
Downloading True Type Fonts .................................................... 232
4 Interfaces.......................................................... 233
Overview............................................................................................ 233
Auto Switching ................................................................................... 233
Centronics Parallel Interface.............................................................. 234
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals .......................................... 235
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface.............................................................. 235
Compatibility Mode...................................................................... 235
Nibble Mode ................................................................................ 236
Byte Mode ................................................................................... 236
Signals ........................................................................................ 236
Terminating Resistor Configurations ........................................... 238
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces ............................................... 239
RS-232 ........................................................................................ 239
RS-422 ........................................................................................ 240
Table of Contents
5 Diagnostics And Troubleshooting ..................... 241
Printer Self-Test................................................................................. 241
Printing Test Labels .................................................................... 241
Troubleshooting Common Situations................................................. 241
Improving Processing Time......................................................... 242
Data Exchange............................................................................ 242
Controlling Print Quality .............................................................. 244
Determining Printhead Wear ....................................................... 245
Replacing The Printhead ................................................................... 245
Prepare The Printer..................................................................... 245
Replace The Printhead ............................................................... 246
Restore The Printer To Operation ............................................... 248
Solving Other Printer Problems ......................................................... 249
Printer Alarms ............................................................................. 256
Fault Messages ........................................................................... 256
A Specifications ................................................... 269
Print Method................................................................................ 269
Media .......................................................................................... 270
Ribbon ......................................................................................... 272
Indicators And Switches .............................................................. 272
Memory ....................................................................................... 272
Host Interfaces ............................................................................ 273
Power .......................................................................................... 273
Environmental ............................................................................. 274
Physical ....................................................................................... 274
Acoustic Specifications ............................................................... 274
B Printer Options ................................................. 275
Hardware Options.............................................................................. 275
Interface Options ......................................................................... 276
Supplies And Accessories ................................................................. 277
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons............................ 277
Genuine Printronix Media............................................................ 278
Accessories ................................................................................. 280
C ASCII Control Codes ........................................ 281
Table of Contents
D Standard And Heavy-Duty Media Cutter
Installation ....................................................... 283
Prepare The Printer ........................................................................... 283
Installing The Standard Cutter .................................................... 284
Restore The Printer To Operation ............................................... 284
Installing The Heavy-Duty Cutter ................................................ 286
Restore The Printer To Operation ............................................... 286
Removing The Media Cutter.............................................................. 287
E Media Cutter Tray Installation .......................... 289
Assembling The Media Cutter Tray ................................................... 289
Installing The Media Cutter Tray........................................................ 290
F Glossary ........................................................... 293
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
Printronix Customer Solutions Center
The Printronix Customer Solutions Center offers technical support with:
•
•
•
•
•
Installation
Configuration and setup
Operation and supplies loading
Specification of the proper media and ribbon
Post sales service support questions.
Call the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at (714) 368-2686 or visit the
Printronix Web page at www.printronix.com.
Training Available On Printronix Products
Printronix offers Product Maintenance Training Classes designed to enhance
the knowledge of your service personnel. Led by Printronix’ staff of highly
trained, experienced instructors, these structured classes include:
•
•
•
•
Hands-on work with the product
Theory of operation
Diagnosis of equipment failures
Preventive and corrective maintenance requirements and procedures.
Customized classes designed to meet your specific needs are available upon
request.
Call Customer Training at (714) 368-2332 or visit the Printronix Web page at
www.printronix.com.
17
Chapter
1
Warnings And Special Information
Warnings And Special Information
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, it is very important that you
read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment.
WARNING
Achten Sie auf folgendes, um keine Personen in Gefahr zu bringen bzw.
das Gerät zu beschädigen.
WARNING
Condiciones que pueden causar daños a personas y equipos.
WARNING
Conditions à respecter pour éviter tout danger corporel et dommage
matériel.
WARNING
Condizioni che possono arrecare danni alle persone e alle
apparecchiature.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Information and helpful tips about printer operation.
Manual Conventions
•
Operator panel keys are printed in uppercase letters.
Example: Press the PAUSE key and then press ENTER.
•
Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon (located on
the control panel directly below the key).
Example: Press the ↵ key for ENTER.
•
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) messages are printed in uppercase letters
inside quotation marks ( “ ” ).
Example: When “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD, you may release the
PAUSE key.
•
LCD fault messages display the specific fault in uppercase letters on the
top line. A corrective action in upper and lowercase letters displays on the
bottom line.
Example: PAPER OUT
Load Paper
•
Key combinations are indicated by the + (plus) symbol.
Example: Press ↑ + ↓ means Press the Up ↑ key and the Down ↓ key at
the same time.
18
Standard Features
The T5000 Series Label Printer
NOTE: As used in this manual, the terms “T5000” and “printer” refer to all
models within the T5000 series.
The T5000 series consists of a family of high quality, direct thermal and
thermal transfer printers specifically designed for printing labels and tags from
any MS-DOS®, Windows®, ASCII, or EBCDIC (with the Coax/Twinax option)
based compatible computer.
The T5000 series is comprised of the products detailed in Table 1.
Table 1. The T5000 Series
Model
Max Print
Speed (ips)
Printing
Density (dpi)
Max Print
Width (inches)
T5204
10
203
4.1
T5204-DT*
10
203
4.1
T5304
8
300
4.1
T5304-DT*
8
300
4.1
T5206
10
203
6.6
T5306
8
300
6.6
T5208
8
203
8.5
T5308
6
300
8.5
* Direct Thermal only 4 inch models (no ribbon transfer support)
Standard Features
•
Your thermal printer has the standard LinePrinter Plus® (LP+) emulation
which provides direct compatibility with Printronix P-series printers. In
addition, the printer has co-resident IGP®/PGL® and IGP/VGL emulations
which provide printer system commands for text, barcodes, graphics,
lines, and boxes.
•
Direct thermal printing and thermal transfer (thermal transfer not
supported on 4 inch DT models).
•
Standard interfaces:
•
Serial: RS-232 and RS-422
•
Parallel: Centronics®-compatible parallel, IEEE® 1284 compliant
parallel
NOTE: The interface cable needed to connect the printer to the host device is
supplied by the user.
•
Supports over 20 types of bar codes.
19
Chapter
1
The T5000 Series Label Printer
•
•
•
Download forms, fonts, and graphics to printer memory.
•
Tear-Off mode for positioning the label at the tear-off position and
detecting its removal before printing the next label.
•
Tear-Off Strip mode for printing a specified number of labels and
positioning the last label at the tear-off position.
•
•
•
8MB DRAM memory.
High resolution printhead for sharp graphics and text.
Label Taken Sensor for detecting removal of labels in Tear-Off mode (and
in Peel-Off mode when optional rewinder is installed).
4MB Flash memory.
Auto Label Mapping® for compatibility with programs written for Printronix
Line Matrix printers.
Optional Features
Ask your authorized representative about the following options which can
enhance the versatility of your printer:
•
Fonts: A selection of fonts is available to extend the capabilities of the
standard resident fonts.
•
Internal Label Rewinder: In label peel-off mode, peels off labels one at a
time before printing the next label and rewinds the liner into a discardable
roll. In batch rewind mode, rewinds printed labels into a removable roll.
•
Memory Expansion (for non-IPDS printers only):
•
16MB DRAM SIMM - Provides additional memory to accommodate
long label formats.
•
10MB Flash SIMM - Provides additional memory to accommodate
IPDS.
•
Media Cutter: The cutter is used to automatically cut printed media when
the media exits the printer.
•
Media Cutter Tray: This option is used with the Media Cutter option to
catch the cut media in a bin.
•
Coax/Twinax Host Interface: This provides connection to an IBM host
computer system using a coax or twinax interface.
•
Network Interface Card (NIC): This option allows you to attach the
printer to a LAN (Local Area Network) rather than attaching it directly to a
host computer.
The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required
hardware to support it, or it can be field installed by an authorized service
representative at a later date. The parallel port is no longer accessible
when the NIC option is installed.
NOTE: In this manual, the terms “Network Interface Card” (or “NIC”) and
“Ethernet” are used interchangeably.
20
Optional Features
•
IPDS: IPDS is available for Coax/Twinax or a NIC or a combination of
both. The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the
required hardware to support it, or it can be field installed by an
authorized service representative at a later date. The printer must have a
Coax/Twinax interface or NIC, 300 DPI Printhead, 16 MB DRAM, and 10
MB Flash, installed to support this field-installed option.
•
TN5250: The TN5250 feature enables your printer to communicate with
an IBM host through a NIC using the 5250 datastream. This feature
allows you to use an application generated for the Twinax emulation to be
printed through the NIC.
•
Online Barcode Validator: This option provides online validation of
printed barcodes. The most important consideration when printing a bar
code is to ensure the bar code will be scanned properly. The best way to
ensure this is to incorporate a bar code quality procedure in the printing
process. If properly implemented, this procedure will increase overall bar
code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes, and achieve high,
first-time read rates. Such a procedure is an increasingly important factor
in newer, more efficient systems, where manually entered data is not
acceptable as a back up function. Validation also minimizes the cost of
returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes.
Printronix offers an integrated online validation system as an option for
the T5000 printer. Other validation tools, such as hand-held models, may
be obtained from the RJS company.
RJS designs and manufactures the world’s most complete line of bar
code validation products, including their portable Inspector and Laser
Inspector models, On-Line Inspector and AutoScan II series. For more
information, visit the RJS Website at www.rjs1.com.
For more information about printer options, see Appendix B.
21
Chapter
1
Thermal Printer Technology
Thermal Printer Technology
Quiet and fast, with excellent print quality, your multifunction thermal printer
uses an inline thermal printhead. The thermal printer operates differently from
a line matrix or laser printer, because the thermal printer uses a printhead with
heating elements and special paper or ribbon.
The Printing Process
The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation:
•
Direct Thermal
During direct thermal printing, the thermal printhead selectively heats
small, rectangular thermal dots. When these contact the coated thermal
paper, the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and
develop an image. This mode of printing is generally used for short-term
labeling applications.
•
Thermal Transfer
During thermal transfer printing, the heated thermal dots contact a
thermal ribbon. The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to
the paper. This method is used especially for abrasive, long-storage
applications and for specialized applications, such as in extreme
environmental conditions or where tamper-proofing is required.
NOTE: Thermal transfer is not supported on 4 inch DT model printers.
Dynamic Print Control
Dynamic Print Control is a unique feature of your thermal printer that provides
excellent print quality. This feature prevents unevenness of print density,
which is usually caused by the stored heat from previous dots.
Print quality largely depends on how the thermal paper or the thermal ribbon
and thermal transfer paper responds to the heat of the thermal printhead.
During printing, the thermal printhead must reach a set temperature in the
shortest possible time. Then it must cool down to the original temperature in
the shortest possible time after printing. Thus print quality is dependent on the
precise control of the energy supplied to the thermal dots.
The Dynamic Print Control is a method for predicting the quantity of heat
required to print dots based on the results of the previous printing. This
prevents unevenness of print density and results in the printing of narrowladder bar codes or vertical grid lines that are straight from the microscopic
viewpoint.
22
Media Selection
Thermal Consumables
Media Selection
Since there are two print modes of operation, there are two kinds of thermal
media:
•
•
Direct thermal media
Thermal transfer media
Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. During direct thermal mode, the heat
from the thermal printhead contacts the paper and causes a chemical reaction
to take place.
Thermal transfer media requires ribbon. A wide range of Printronix thermal
transfer media is available, such as film or synthetic paper substitutes. Most
of these media options can be die-cut for easy label applications. The wide
selection of media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix
ribbons for print quality and usage. Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies
Catalog or contact the factory. You can obtain further information by calling
the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at (714) 368-2686 or accessing the
Printronix Web page at www.printronix.com.
NOTE: The term “media” used in this manual refers to all the different kinds
of paper or tag stock that can be used in the printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Media” on page 278 for more information.
Ribbons
Printronix offers a wide range of ribbons that have been specifically
engineered to enhance printing capabilities and to prevent premature
printhead wear. Therefore, you should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal
Ribbon in your printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons” on page 277 for more
information.
23
Chapter
1
Setting Up The Printer
Setting Up The Printer
Unpacking The Printer
The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag. The top lid of the carton
has instructions on how to remove the internal packing material from the
printer. Keep all packing material in case shipping is required.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic
discharge damage while setting up the printer. The discharge of
accumulated electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead
or electronic components used in this device.
CAUTION
Damage to the printer interface connector may result from placing the
printer on its backside during unpacking or handling.
Frame
Media Cover
Tape Strips (2)
Foam Pads (2)
1. Remove the tape strips from the media cover. Lift open the media cover.
2. Remove the tape securing the foam pad to the inside of the media cover.
3. Remove the foam pad between the front door and the frame.
24
Unpacking The Printer
Foam
4. Remove the foam pad between the pivoting deck and the frame.
Pivoting
Deck
Platen
Foam
Pad
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
5. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully
clockwise.
6. Remove the foam pad from between the printhead and the platen (rubber
roller).
7. Close the pivoting deck and media cover.
25
Chapter
1
Setting Up The Printer
Installation
The following sections will guide you through the installation of the printer.
1. Place the printer in a suitable location on a flat level surface that allows
easy access to all sides of the printer.
CAUTION
The printer should never be operated while resting on its side or upside
down.
2. Check that the printer power switch is in the OFF (O) position.
WARNING
Failure to properly ground the printer may result in electric shock to the
operator.
In compliance with international safety standards this printer has been
equipped with a three-pronged power cord. When inserted in a correctly
wired power outlet the ground conductor will ensure that the printer
chassis is at ground (earth) potential. Do not use adapter plugs or
remove the grounding prong from the cable plug. If an extension cord is
required, ensure that a three-wire cable with a properly grounded plug is
used.
3. Attach the AC power cord to the AC power receptacle in the back of the
printer.
CAUTION
Verify the required voltage on the printer’s model number label on the
rear of the printer.
4. Attach the AC power cord to a grounded (three prong) electrical outlet of
the proper voltage.
26
Installation
5. Attach Interface:
a. Parallel Interface
Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the
Centronics/IEEE 1284 interface connector at the back of the printer.
Snap the bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the
interface cable to the printer.
b. Serial Interface
Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB-25
RS-232 Serial interface connector at the back of the printer. For
additional information on serial cable wiring, refer to “Diagnostics And
Troubleshooting” on page 241.
NOTE: The printer supports simultaneous connection of the Parallel and
Serial interfaces using the Auto Switching feature. Auto Switching is
described on page 233.
Serial Connection
Debug Connection
Parallel Interface
27
Chapter
1
Setting Up The Printer
If your printer is equipped with the Coax/Twinax and Network Interface
Card (NIC) interfaces, the rear I/O panel will look like the picture below.
Twinax Connection
Coax Connection
NIC Connection
c.
Coax Connection
Attach a suitable coaxial cable from the computer to the coax
connector located in the I/O plate in the back of the printer.
d. Twinax Connection
Attach a suitable twinax cable from the computer to the twinax
connector located in the I/O plate in the back of the printer.
e. NIC Connection
Insert a suitable NIC cable from your hub or switch to the NIC
connector located in the I/O panel in the rear of your printer.
28
2
Operation
Controls And Indicators
Power Switch
The power switch is located on the bottom back panel of the printer. To apply
power, place the switch in the | (ON) position. When you first power on the
printer, a series of initialization messages will appear on the control panel
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
To remove power, place the power switch in the O (OFF) position.
Control Panel
The control panel is located on the front of the printer and includes an LCD,
indicators, and control keys (buttons). These are described in the following
tables. (Also refer to Chapter 3.)
Online Status
Indicator
OFFLINE
Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD)
Job In Process
Indicator
29
Chapter
30
Indicator
Indicates when the
printer is receiving or
processing data.
Function in
Menu Mode
Stays lit when the
printer is online, ready
to print, and accept
data from the host.
Off when the printer is
offline.
Off.
Flashes during a fault
condition.
Flashes during a fault
condition.
Flashes during a fault
condition.
Displays “ONLINE,” the
interface type, and
emulation in use.
Displays “OFFLINE.”
Displays “OFFLINE”
and a main menu,
submenu, or option.
During a fault condition,
displays the specific
fault message and the
corrective action.
During a fault
condition, displays the
specific fault message
and the corrective
action.
During a fault
condition, displays the
specific fault message
and the corrective
action.
Flashes when receiving
data.
Flashes when
receiving data.
None
Stays lit when data has
been processed and is
waiting to be printed.
Stays lit when data has
been processed and is
waiting to be printed.
Off when no data is
being received or when
no data remains in the
buffer.
Off when no data is
being received or when
no data remains in the
buffer.
Controls And Indicators
Job In Process
A backlighted Liquid
Crystal Display with two
rows of 16 characters
each.
Function in
Offline Mode
Status and Display Indicators
Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD)
Indicates when the
printer is online, offline,
or when there is a fault
condition.
Function in
Online Mode
2
Online Status
Description
Button
Function in
Online Mode
Function in
Offline Mode
Function in
Menu Mode
PAUSE Key
Toggles the printer between
online and offline modes.
Sets printer to Offline
Mode.
Sets printer to Online
Mode.
Sets printer to Offline
Mode.
JOB SELECT Key
None
Selects a pre-stored
printer configuration.
Scrolls left through
main menus.
Decrements option
values within
submenus.
Advances the media
one label length.
Advances the media
one label length.
Scrolls the current
menu selection one
level up.
None
Scrolls through the
Test Print patterns.
Scrolls right through
main menus.
Increments option
values within
submenus.
DECREMENT Key in
Menu Mode
FEED Key
Control Panel Keys
-
Description
UP Key in Menu Mode
+
INCREMENT Key in
Menu Mode
31
Control Panel
TEST PRINT Key
Pressing the ↵ (ENTER) key
with a Diagnostic Test displayed
initiates the test. Pressing the ↵
(ENTER) key again terminates
the test.
Chapter
32
Button
Description
Function in
Online Mode
Function in
Offline Mode
Function in
Menu Mode
MENU Key
Takes the printer
Offline and selects the
Menu mode.
Selects the Menu
mode.
Scrolls between main
menu selections.
ENTER Key
Pressing the ↵ (ENTER) key in
Menu Mode selects the displayed
option or value. An asterisk then
appears next to the option or value
indicating it has been selected.
Note: If the ENTER key is locked,
“ENTER SWITCH LOCKED”
displays on the LCD for one second.
Press the (DOWN) and
↵ (ENTER) keys at the same time to
unlock the ENTER key and select
an option or value.
None
None
Selects the current
menu value and
displays an asterisk
(*) next to the value.
DOWN Key in Menu Mode
Controls And Indicators
Scrolls the current
menu selection one
level down.
2
Clears all data in the
printer data buffer
when enabled.
Control Panel Keys (cont.)
None
CANCEL Key
When the CANCEL key is enabled,
pressing it will clear all data in the
printer buffer and prevent printing of
that data.
Note: The factory default = Disable.
However, when the Coax/Twinax
interface option is installed, the
factory default = Enable.
Powering On The Printer
Powering On The Printer
When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. During the self-test, the
LCD momentarily displays the DPI resolution (203 or 300 DPI) of the installed
printhead. The default power-on state is online. Once the printer has
successfully initialized, the ONLINE status indicator light illuminates, and the
LCD indicates the communication interface selected and the type of
emulation installed.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the ONLINE status indicator flashes, and
a fault message appears on the display. The alarm may also sound, if it is
configured to do so.
Operating Modes
The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or
can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.
Online: In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the
host. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer between the online and
offline mode. The ONLINE status indicator is lit in online mode.
Offline: In offline mode, you can perform operator functions such as loading
media or changing ribbon. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer from
offline to online mode. The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline
mode.
Menu: In menu mode, you can navigate through the configuration menus to
make changes or verify option settings. Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the
printer from menu to offline mode. The ONLINE status indicator is not
illuminated in menu mode.
Fault: In fault mode, a fault condition exists that must be cleared before
printing can continue. The ONLINE status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps
(if configured to do so), and a descriptive fault message displays.
The fault must be corrected first and then the message cleared by pressing
the PAUSE key before normal printing can continue.
Media Handling Modes
Before you load media, you must decide which media handling mode to use
as described below:
•
Continuous. Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front. When
the optional internal rewinder is installed, use Continuous for Batch
Rewind mode (see page 49).
•
Tear-Off Strip. Prints on media and sends it out the front until the print
buffer is empty, then positions the last label over the tear bar for removal.
•
Tear-Off. After each label is printed, the printer positions the label over
the front edge of the tear bar and waits for you to tear-off the label before
printing the next one (on-demand printing). A “Remove Label” message
will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be
printed.
33
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
•
Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). The label liner is rewound on the optional
internal rewinder. A “Remove Label” message will display to remind you
to remove the label before the next one can be printed. For Label Peel-off
information, see page 55.
•
Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or can cut after a specified number of
labels have been printed using a software cut command.
Once you have decided on the mode, configure the printer. See Chapter 3 for
more information.
Loading Media And Ribbon
NOTE: This section describes the procedures for loading various types of
media and ribbon. You can also refer to instructions on the printer
itself, on a label on the inside of the media cover.
The term “media” used in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper,
label, or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer. This section
explains how to load roll media, fanfold media, and transfer ribbon.
Your thermal printer can print on continuous paper, adhesive backed labels, or
non-adhesive tags packaged in roll or fanfold form.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the
printhead assembly. The discharge of electrostatic energy that
accumulates on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can
damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this
device.
Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the backing liner can
jam the printer. This can cause the label to peel off the liner. The
exposed edges can stick to the label guides and rollers inside the
printer.
If you run out of labels while printing, do not turn the power switch to
the OFF position while reloading labels, because you can lose data.
34
Loading Roll Media
Loading Roll Media
Media Cover
Media Hanger
Media Hanger
Guide
Pivoting
Deck
t53loc2a
Media Width
Guide
Deck Lock
Lever
1. Open the media cover.
2. Slide the blue media hanger guide outward to the end of the media
hanger, and flip it down horizontally.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully
clockwise.
4. Slide the blue media width guide close to the outside end of the media
damper.
35
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Media Roll
Media Hanger
Guide
Media Hanger
5. Slide a roll of media onto and towards the back of the media hanger. The
media feeds from the top of the roll and towards the front of the printer.
6. Flip up the media hanger guide, and slide it in against the outer edge of
the media roll.
36
Loading Roll Media
Printhead
Media Damper
Platen (Rubber
Drive Roller)
7. Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen
(rubber drive roller) and the printhead.
You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside
the media cover for media loading instructions.
37
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Media Sensor
Media Guard
Fixed Guide
Media
Width Guide
Media Sensor
Handle
Media
Damper
8. Verify that the left (inside) edge of the media is against the fixed guide on
the bottom of the media damper.
9. Push the blue media width guide in until it is flush with the outer edge of
the media.
10. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor (it is blue and located
under the media guard), and refer to “Positioning The Media Sensor” on
page 61.
38
Loading Roll Media
Platen
(left edge)
Media
(left edge)
11. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the left straight edge of the
platen (rubber drive roller).
39
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Pivoting
Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
12. Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the pivoting deck
and rotating the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to
advance media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINTHEAD UP”
fault message to display.
13. Verify that Print Mode in the Printer Configuration Menu is set for the
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). The Print Mode submenu is
located in the MEDIA CONTROL menu. See “Main Menu” on page 79 for
details.
For direct thermal operation (no ribbon required) close the media cover
and go to step 14.
For thermal transfer operation (which uses a ribbon) complete the ribbon
loading procedure (see “Loading Ribbon” on page 45).
14. Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances.
15. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online. The printer is now ready
for printing.
40
Loading Fanfold Media
Loading Fanfold Media
Media Cover
Fanfold
Tension
Arm
Fanfold
Media
Pivoting
Deck
Media
Hanger
Guide
Media
Hanger
Deck Lock Lever
1. Open the media cover.
2. Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger,
and rotate it downward to a horizontal position to remove any roll media.
3. Place the fanfold media either behind or beneath the printer, depending
on the desired fanfold supply location. Insert the first few labels through
either the rear or bottom panel opening.
4. Place the media over the media hanger, flush against the back of the
printer.
5. Flip up the media hanger guide and slide it in against the outer edge of
the fanfold media.
6. Flip the fanfold tension arm down by pushing on it through the opening at
the top of the media hanger guide.
7. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until
the deck swings upward.
41
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Media Sensor
Media Guard
Fixed Guide
Media
Width Guide
Media Sensor
Handle
Media
Damper
8. Slide the media width guide outward to the end of the media damper.
9. Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen
(rubber drive roller) and the printhead. You can also refer to the arrows on
the printer frame or to the label inside the media cover for media loading
instructions.
Verify that the left (inside) edge of the media is against the fixed guide on
the bottom of the media damper.
10. Slide the media width guide inward against the outer edge of the media.
11. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor (it is blue and located
under the media guard), and refer to “Positioning The Media Sensor” on
page 61.
42
Loading Fanfold Media
Platen
(left edge)
Media
(left edge)
12. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the left straight edge of the
platen (rubber drive roller).
43
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Pivoting
Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
13. Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the pivoting deck
and rotating the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise. This locks the
pivoting deck and printhead assembly into the printing position.
Verify that Print Mode in the Printer Configuration Menu is set for the
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). If Thermal Transfer media is
installed, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 45. The Print Mode submenu is
located in the MEDIA CONTROL menu. See “Main Menu” on page 79 for
more information.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to
advance media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINTHEAD UP”
fault message to display.
14. Press the FEED key once to verify that the labels advance.
15. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online.
The printer is now ready for printing.
44
Loading Ribbon
Loading Ribbon
Skip this section for 4 inch DT models or when using direct
thermal printing.
Pivoting
Deck
Ribbon
Roll
Ribbon Supply
Spindle
Deck Lock
Lever
1. Install the empty supply core on the take-up spindle.
2. Slide the ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply spindle until it stops against
the spindle flange.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until
the deck swings upward.
45
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
Printhead
Media
Rear Ribbon
Guide Roller
4. Thread the end of the ribbon under the rear ribbon guide roller, then
between the platen and the printhead.
You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside
the media cover for media loading instructions.
46
Loading Ribbon
Media Cover
Take-up
Core
Take-up
Spindle
5. Wrap the ribbon from the front of the printhead assembly to the front of
the ribbon take-up spindle. Attach the ribbon to the fiberboard core on the
ribbon take-up spindle with tape.
When installing a new roll of ribbon, attach the ribbon leader adhesive
strip to the ribbon take-up core. Manually rotate the spindle clockwise to
feed the unusable portion of the ribbon leader around the take-up spindle.
IMPORTANT
Do not attach the ribbon to the ribbon take-up spindle without a core
installed. Proper ribbon tension and ribbon removal is based on the use
of a fiberboard core.
6. Close the pivoting deck (see page 44).
7. Close the printer media cover if the rewinder is not needed.
47
Chapter
2
Loading Media And Ribbon
8. Verify that Print Mode is set for Transfer in the Print Mode submenu
located in the MEDIA CONTROL Main Configuration menu. See “Main
Menu” on page 79 for more information.
9. The printer is now ready to print.
Removing The Media Guide
Remove the media guide from the front door when using Tear-Off or Tear-Off
Strip media handling, because you will need to tear the label downward
against the tear bar.
Tear Bar
Front
Door
Media
Guide
Hook
Groove
1. Open the front door by pulling it upward, then forward.
2. Grasp the upper right corner of the media guide and pry it off of the top of
the front door.
3. After removing the media guide, close the front door.
4. Open the pivoting deck and load paper and ribbon normally (see “Loading
Media And Ribbon” on page 34.)
48
Batch Rewind Mode
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
The printer can be set up to rewind labels after they have been printed (Batch
Rewind Mode) or to automatically peel labels from their backing and dispense
them one at a time while rewinding the liner (Peel-Off Mode). Both modes
require use of an internal rewinder. The internal rewinder is available as a
factory installed option only.
Batch Rewind Mode
Batch Rewind allows you to automatically rewind printed labels into a roll
using the optional internal rewinder.
Configuring the Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to “Continuous” under the MEDIA CONTROL Main
Menu. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring The Printer” for more information.)
2. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” displays.
49
Chapter
2
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
Installing The Media Guide
The media guide must be installed on the front door when using Batch
Rewind mode. To install the media guide:
Front
Door
Media
Guide
Hook
Groove
1. Open the front door by pulling it upwards, then forward.
2. The bottom of the plastic media guide is shaped like a hook and the top
has a groove:
a. Hook the bottom of the media guide under the bottom edge of the
front door.
b. Snap the groove on the media guide to the top edge of the front door.
3. Close the front door.
50
Batch Rewind Mode
Loading Media
Rewinder
Release
Lever
Rewinder
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 35 and complete
steps 1 through 10.
51
Chapter
2
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
Media
Media
Guide
Release
Lever
Slot
2. Thread the media over the front of the media guide and through the
opening under the front door toward the internal rewinder.
IMPORTANT
If you do not complete the following step, it will be extremely difficult to
remove the printed labels from the rewinder.
Raised Ridge
Back Flange
Slot
Media or Liner
Release Lever
(counterclockwise position)
3. Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in
place. This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder.
4. Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder,
and slide the media against the back flange.
5. Hold the media edge in the slot and manually rotate the rewinder one full
revolution counterclockwise until the media is taut.
52
Batch Rewind Mode
Media Cover
Deck Lock
Lever
6. Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock
lever counterclockwise against its stop to place the printhead assembly
into the printing position.
7. Press the FEED key to advance the media to the next TOF (Top-of-Form)
position.
8. Press the PAUSE key until “ONLINE” displays.
9. Close the media cover.
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 5 inches of printed
labels. Exceeding this diameter can cause the printed labels to rub on
the bottom pan.
53
Chapter
2
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
Removing Printed Media from the Rewinder
Release
Lever
Printhead
Rewinder
1. Open the media cover.
2. Press the FEED key to advance the last printed label past the printhead,
and tear the liner from behind the last printed label.
3. Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the rewinder by turning
the rewinder counterclockwise.
4. Turn the release lever on the rewinder clockwise.
5. Slide the roll of printed labels off the rewinder.
54
Label Peel-Off
Label Peel-Off
You can set up the printer to automatically peel die-cut labels off their liner
(backing) and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner.
You can install the media guide to prevent long labels from accidentally
adhering to the front door assembly, but it is normally not needed when using
labels less than two inches long (see “Installing The Media Guide” on page
50).
Configuring the Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to “Peel-Off” under the MEDIA CONTROL Main
Menu. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring The Printer” for more information.)
2. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” displays.
Loading Media
1. If you want to install the media guide to print long labels, do so now by
completing the steps listed in “Installing The Media Guide” on page 50.
2. Open the media cover and refer to the Label Peel-Off illustration on the
Ribbon and Media Loading instruction label on the inside of the cover.
Pivoting
Deck
Media Guide
Deck Lock
Lever
Tear Bar
Bottom Roller
Front Door
3. Open the front door by pulling it upward, then forward.
4. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever clockwise until the
deck swings upward.
5. Thread the media (label and liner) over the tear bar and around the
bottom roller, then through the opening at the bottom of the front door and
into the printer.
55
Chapter
2
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
Raised Ridge
Back Flange
Slot
Liner
IMPORTANT
Release Lever
If you do not complete the following step, it will be difficult to remove
the liner from the rewinder.
6. Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in
place. This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder.
7. Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder,
and slide the media against the back flange.
8. Hold the media in the slot and rotate the rewinder one full revolution
counterclockwise until the media is taut.
9. Remove labels from the liner so that behind the tear bar the liner is void of
labels for about 1.5 inches and below the tear bar for about 2 inches.
10. Close the front door.
11. Complete the media routing as shown above.
56
Label Peel-Off
Media Cover
Deck Lock
Lever
12. Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock
lever fully counterclockwise.
13. Press the FEED key. The label advances to the peel-off position, and
“Remove Label” displays on the LCD.
14. Manually remove the peeled label from the printer.
15. Press the PAUSE key until “ONLINE” displays.
16. Close the media cover.
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 5 inches of liner.
Exceeding this diameter can cause the liner to rub on the bottom pan.
The rewinder is designed to support the full amount of liner from a
standard 8-inch diameter media roll.
57
Chapter
2
Using The Optional Internal Rewinder
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover.
2. Open the front door.
3. Tear the liner at the tear bar.
4. Manually rewind the remaining liner onto the rewinder by turning the
rewinder counterclockwise.
5. Turn the release lever on the rewinder clockwise.
6. Slide the roll of label liner off the rewinder and discard.
58
Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Printing Adjustments
Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Active Pressure
Setting
Printhead Pressure
Adjustment Dial
Sometimes you will need to adjust printhead pressure because of variations in
media thickness and width. The printhead pressure adjustment dial is shown
above. The value shown at the bottom of the dial is the active setting.
In general, adjust printhead pressure to the lowest value which produces the
desired print quality. Die cut labels usually require a setting of 4, while heavy
stock requires a setting of 6 to max. The numbers on the Printhead Pressure
Adjustment Lever are relative only and do not indicate a specific printhead
pressure or media thickness. By following this procedure, you will minimize
printhead wear.
59
Chapter
2
Printing Adjustments
Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments
Pressure Block
Adjustment Scale
Right Pressure
Block Pointer
Lead Screw
Knob
Left
Pressure
Block
Left Pressure
Block Handle
Right Pressure
Block
Printhead Pressure Block adjustments are used to obtain a uniform print
density across the width of the installed media under a variety of media and
ribbon conditions.
Left Pressure Block
Under normal printing conditions, the left block should be set with its handle
aligned with the bold mark on the pressure block adjustment scale. When
using media or ribbon widths less than one-third the printer’s maximum
printing width, you may need to manually slide the left pressure block further
to the left.
Right Pressure Block
This block should be positioned with its pointer (handle on 4 inch printer
models) near the right edge of the media or ribbon in use. Turn the Lead
Screw Knob clockwise to move the block right or counterclockwise to move it
left.
Check the pressure block positioning by printing the Grey test pattern:
1. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
2. Press the TEST PRINT key until “Printer Tests/Grey” displays.
60
Positioning The Media Sensor
3. Press the ↵ key to start the Grey test pattern. The pattern will start and
continue to print.
4. Press the ↵ key to stop printing.
5. Check the test pattern. If necessary reposition the pressure blocks to
obtain a uniform print density across the media width. In most cases, only
the right pressure block may need to be adjusted.
6. Whenever you reposition a pressure block, run the Grey test pattern to
verify the print pattern is acceptable.
Positioning The Media Sensor
Media Sensor
Inside Handle
Platen
Media Guard
Your printer is equipped with a media sensor that is used to detect the top-ofform position on media that has label length indicators (gaps, notches, holes,
or black marks) and detect when a Paper Out condition exists.
Use the handles on the media sensor to horizontally position it in the center of
the label length indicators on the installed media. When using media with no
label length indicators, position the sensor in the center of the media so it can
detect when a Paper Out condition exists.
Check the horizontal position of the media sensor by looking through the long
narrow opening in the media guard located behind the platen (rubber roller).
Place the center of the black portion of the sensor directly under the notch,
hole or black mark on the installed media. You can also use the left edge of
the inside sensor handle as a reference and set it 1/4 inch to the left of the
desired location on the installed media.
61
Chapter
2
Printing Adjustments
NOTE: The media sensor should not be placed in the path of media features
that could cause false gap detection or paper out faults. Such
features are dark pre-printing, rounded die-cut label corners, vertical
gaps associated with side-by-side labels, and extraneous cut-outs, as
shown below.
Position the media
sensor in either of
the grey shaded
areas.
Dark Pre-printing
Extraneous Cut-out
Vertical Gap
Sensing Different Media Types
The printer’s Media Sensor can detect the different types of label length
indicators on a large variety of media types. This is accomplished by selecting
the correct sensor option: Gap, Mark or Disable under Gap/Mark Sensor in
the CALIBRATE CTRL menu. Figure 10 on page 271 illustrates the different
media types and label length indicators used on them.
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press ↓ and ↵ together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the
..
.
key until “CALIBRATE CTRL” displays.
4. Press the ↓ key until “Gap/Mark Sensor/ Disable*” (the currently enabled)
option displays.
5. Press the + key or - key until the option that matches the type of label
length indicators on the installed media displays. The different Gap/Mark
Sensor options are described below:
•
Gap - Select when using media with a liner space between die-cut
labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length
indicators.
•
Mark - Select when using media that has horizontal black marks
located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock.
•
Disable - Select when using media with no label length indicators (no
gaps, notches, holes, or black marks), or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the
Label Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the
value sent via host software.
62
Running Auto Calibrate
6. Press the ↵ key to enable the displayed option. An asterisk (*) appears
next to the selection.
7. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
8. Review the Calibrating the Media Sensor section below.
9. Perform the Auto Calibrate procedure on page 63.
Calibrating The Media Sensor
Due to manufacturing differences in media and ribbon, the Media Sensor may
have difficulty distinguishing the difference between the label and the liner or
the label and the black mark. When this occurs, the printer may intermittently
skip a label or display a fault message such as “GAP NOT DETECTED/See
Manual” or “PAPER OUT/Load Paper.”
Media Sensor sensitivity and reliability can be improved by changing the Gap/
Mark Threshold and/or Paper Out Threshold values. These values can be
changed automatically by performing the Auto Calibrate or Manual Calibrate
procedure in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or changed manually by entering
your own Gap/Mark Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values. The changes
in values take effect immediately within the current configuration menu.
Auto or Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed
Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media. When
Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing
edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (or one label + one gap).
When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the
leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
When you have completed Auto or Manual Calibrate, you can verify the new
values are correct by pressing the control panel FEED key several times.
Each time the key is pressed, media should advance one label and stop at the
correct Top-of-Form position of the next label.
Once the correct values are confirmed, they should be saved to the desired
configuration menu before powering off the printer. See “Saving A
Configuration” on page 72.
Running Auto Calibrate
Auto Calibrate can be initialized via the TEST PRINT key (described in detail
below), or via the CALIBRATE CTRL or DIAGNOSTIC menus in Menu mode.
NOTE: Verify that the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Gap/Mark Sensor option
(Gap, Mark, or Disable), matches the installed media. See “Sensing
Different Media Types” on page 62.
Check that the Media Sensor is horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensor” on page 61.
If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display, “CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable PeelOff.” Before you can do an Auto Calibrate, you must select another
media handling mode.
1. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
63
Chapter
2
Printing Adjustments
2. Press the ↓ key and ↵ key together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED”
displays.
3. Press the TEST PRINT key until “Printer Tests/Auto Calibrate” displays.
4. Press the ↵ key. Media advances until it can accurately detect the label
length indicators and then stops at the Top-of-Form position. The Sensed
Distance will then display for 1 second.
5. Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly
matches that of the installed media.
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance value is the physical
length of one label plus the length of one gap.
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance value is the
physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the
leading edge of the next.
•
Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable: Not applicable. If Gap/Mark Sensor is
set to Disable, the Sensed Distance value will not be updated.
If “GAP NOT DETECTED” displays you should run Auto Calibrate again.
If Auto Calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance
value displayed or a fault message displayed, you should run Manual
Calibrate as described on page 66 or see Table 15 on page 257.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the
length of a label and transitions detected, without error, between a
label and its label length indicators.
6. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” displays.
7. Press the FEED key several times. Each time the FEED key is pressed
the media should advance one label length and stop.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling Mode selected under the
MEDIA CONTROL menu. Tear-Off and Tear-Off Strip Media
Handling will position the label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous
will position the label edge under the printhead.
8. Press the PAUSE key until “ONLINE” displays.
Once the Sensed Distance value is confirmed, you will need to save it to the
desired configuration menu before powering off the printer. See “Saving A
Configuration” on page 72.
Running Media Profile
This feature provides a profile printout showing the relationship of the Paper
Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark Threshold values and illustrates if and when
each label length indicator is detected and the contrast difference between
the label length indicators and the label. The profile printout (see Figure 1 on
page 65) assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media. This includes
pre-printed labels and labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
Once Media Profile is initiated, the printer will continue to advance media and
print the profile in landscape until the ↵ key is pressed to stop printing.
64
Running Media Profile
NOTE: Verify that the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Gap/Mark Sensor option
(Gap, Mark or Disable) matches the installed media. See “Sensing
Different Media Types” on page 62.
You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support
the Profile printout.
Check that the Media Sensor is horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensor” on page 61.
Check that the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA CONTROL
menu matches the media installed. Select “Direct” for heat sensitive
media (no ribbon required) or “Transfer” for Thermal Transfer media
(ribbon required).
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the ↓ key and ↵ key together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED”
displays.
3. Press the
..
.
key until “CALIBRATE CTRL” displays.
4. Press the ↓ key until “Media Profile/Profile Print” displays and then press
the ↵ key. (The printer will continue to print the profile until the ↵ key is
pressed.)
The printer will advance media and continue to print a dynamic profile
image depicting the relationship of the label and any label length
indicators detected.
5. Press the ↵ key. The printer will stop printing.
6. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” displays.
NOTE: The Gap/Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Profile
printout represent the last values determined from a successful Auto
or Manual Calibrate, or the factory default values if no Auto or Manual
Calibrate was performed.
255
Paper Out(209)
Gap Mark(178)
191
127
063
000
Figure 1. Media Profile Printout
65
Chapter
2
Printing Adjustments
Running Manual Calibrate
Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from
Auto Calibrate fail to improve the media sensor’s ability to sense label length
indicators on the installed media. You must first enable Advanced User in the
PRINTER CONTROL menu before accessing or initializing Manual Calibrate
in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu.
NOTE: Verify that the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Gap/Mark Sensor option
(Gap, Mark, or Disable), matches the installed media. See “Sensing
Different Media Types” on page 62.
Check that the Media Sensor is horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning The Media
Sensor” on page 61.
Check that the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA CONTROL
menu matches the media installed. Select “Direct” for heat sensitive
media (no ribbon required) or “Transfer” for Thermal Transfer media
(ribbon required).
If you try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display, “CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable PeelOff.” Before you can do a Manual Calibrate, you must select another
media handling mode.
1. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the ↓ key and ↵ key together until “ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED”
displays.
3. Press the
..
.
key until “PRINTER CONTROL” displays.
4. Press the ↑ key until “Advanced User” displays and then press the + key
until “Enable” displays.
5. Press the ↵ key to select Enable - an asterisk (*) appears next to Enable.
6. Press the
..
.
key until “CALIBRATE CTRL” displays.
7. Press the ↓ key until “Manual Calibrate/Run Calibrate” displays and then
press the ↵ key.
8. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD. Example: “REMOVE
RBN&MEDIA/Press Enter” indicates that you must open the pivoting deck
and remove the ribbon and media from under the printhead, close and
lock the pivoting deck, and press the ENTER ↵ key.
9. During the last step of Manual Calibrate the printer will advance the media
and attempt to detect the label length indicators and stop at the Top-ofForm position. The Sensed Distance value will then display for 1 second.
The Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly
matches that of the installed media. If “CALIBRATION FAIL/ See
Manual” displays, you should run Manual Calibrate again.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Manual Calibrate is based on
the length of a label and the transitions detected without error,
between a label and its label length indicators.
10. Press the PAUSE key until “OFFLINE” displays.
66
General Cleaning
11. Press the FEED key several times. Each time the FEED key is pressed
the media should advance one label length and stop.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling Mode selected under the
MEDIA CONTROL menu. Tear-Off and Tear-Off Strip Media
Handling will position the label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous
will position the label edge under the printhead.
12. Once the correct values are confirmed, you will need to save them to the
desired configuration menu before powering off the printer. See “Saving A
Configuration” on page 72.
Cleaning
Depending on the media used, the printer may accumulate residues (media
dust, adhesives, etc.) as a by-product of the normal printing process. To
maintain top printing quality, these residues should be removed by a periodic
cleaning of the printer.
General Cleaning
Periodic cleaning should be performed on all rollers, guides, and assemblies.
Low pressure air can be used to remove dust in the printer. Isopropyl alcohol
and a cotton swab should be used to clean any areas where media dust,
adhesives, etc. have accumulated. This general cleaning will insure that all
parts are free of residue which may degrade print quality.
The media path and printhead should be cleaned each time a new roll of
media is installed in the printer.
Printhead Cleaning
As you use your printer, the printhead may become dirty resulting in poor print
quality. You should clean the printhead each time you install new ribbon
(thermal transfer print mode) or install new media (direct thermal print mode).
Clean the printhead with the printhead Cleaning Pen supplied with the printer.
The printhead heating elements (light brown area) are most important.
Keeping your printhead clean will help to maintain its life.
67
Chapter
2
Cleaning
Pivoting
Deck
Printhead
Elements
Deck Lock
Lever
1. Rotate the deck lock clockwise to open the pivoting deck and remove any
media and ribbon (if loaded) to gain access to the printhead assembly
heating element area.
2. Gently rub the felt tip of the Cleaning Pen or a cotton swab with Isopropyl
alcohol across the printhead heating elements (light brown area).
3. Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before reloading the media and
ribbon.
68
3
Configuring The Printer
Overview
The configuration process is done using the printer configuration keys on the
control panel and includes the following:
•
•
•
•
Configuring the printer for different host interface options
Customizing label formats
Checking printer status
Running various maintenance tests
NOTE: Control codes sent by the host system will override the control panel
settings.
This section explains how to use the control panel to change individual
settings and save them as a customized configuration. For details on the
control panel keys and how they work, see “Controls And Indicators” on page
29.
Pressing ↓ and ↵ together unlocks or locks the printer menu (menu mode
only) and permits value selection. This is the default key combination for
locking/unlocking the printer. You can change the key combination. See “Set
Lock Key” on page 121.
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters
Configuration parameters are set from the control panel or are retrieved from
the printer’s memory. The parameters define how the printer will respond to
command and interface signals from the host computer.
The configuration menu structure consists of main menus and the options
applicable to each menu.
NOTE: Some configurations refer to printer options that may not be present
in your printer. Selecting an option or feature that is not present will
result in no action being performed by the printer or an “OPTION NOT
INSTALLED” message will display on the LCD.
69
Chapter
3
Overview
Moving Within The Configuration Menu
You can move through the configuration menus using the appropriate
navigation keys, as shown in Figure 2. (See “Controls And Indicators” on
page 29 for more details on the function of the operator panel keys.)
You can select different options and save them as the power on default;
however, you can only save them to configuration menus 1-8. The factory
configuration menu can be altered, but not saved.
When the printer is online, the first line of the LCD displays “ONLINE” and the
second line lists the active interface port and type of emulation.
To configure the printer:
.
1. Press the .. key to enter the printer configuration menu system.
“MENU MODE/VALIDATOR” displays on the LCD.
2. You can move through configuration main menus in two ways:
Step
Press the
•
Press the + key to move right or the - key to move left
Press
1
2
..
.
•
key to move to the right
LCD
Notes
OFFLINE
↓&↵
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
Allows you to make
configuration
changes.
3
..
.
MENU MODE
VALIDATOR
Enables the printer
configuration menu.
4
..
.
MENU MODE
MEDIA CONTROL
Selects the MEDIA
CONTROL main
menu.
5
↓ UNTIL
Print Mode
Transfer*
6
+ or –
Print Mode
Direct
Cycles through the
choices.
7
↵
Print Mode
Direct*
Selects the Direct
transfer mode.
Figure 2. Moving within the Configuration Menu
70
Selecting A Menu Option
Selecting A Menu Option
To select an option, you need to press the ↵ key. By default, however, the
↵ key is “locked” when the printer is turned on to prevent accidental changes
to the configuration menu. If you press the ↵ key when the key is locked, the
message “ENTER SWITCH LOCKED” displays on the LCD for one second,
and the value will not be selected.
To unlock the ↵ key, press the ↓ and ↵ keys simultaneously. This toggles the
enter lock function.
•
If this function is performed while the ↵ key is locked, the message
“ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED” displays for one second, and the ENTER
key will be unlocked.
•
If this function is performed while the ↵ key is unlocked, the message
“ENTER SWITCH LOCKED” displays for one second, and the ↵ key will
be locked.
When you press the ↵ key (with the ↵ key unlocked), you select the value or
option that displays. An asterisk displays after the value you selected, and the
configuration is changed immediately.
IMPORTANT
This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the
printer as soon as the ↵ (ENTER) key is pressed and the asterisk (*) is
displayed. The configuration change(s), stay in effect only while the
printer is powered on. When the power is turned off, all current
configurations will be lost unless changes made to it are saved via the
CONFIG. CONTROL menu.
To save configuration information permanently or to select it as the power-up
default, see “Saving A Configuration” on page 72.
Changing Printer Settings
You can change (or “configure”) printer settings, such as print speed or
emulations, through the control panel as follows:
1. Press the
..
.
key until the following message displays.
MENU MODE
MEDIA CONTROL
2. Press the ↓ key to cycle through these options:
•
Print Intensity
•
Print Speed
•
Print Mode
•
Media Handling
•
Paper Feed Shift
•
Label Length
•
Label Width
71
Chapter
3
Overview
•
Ver Image Shift
•
Hor Image Shift
•
Orientation
3. When the desired submenu displays, press the
through the values or options.
+ or - key to scroll
4. Press the ↵ key to select a value. An asterisk (*) displays next to the
selected value or option.
5. If there are more submenu values or options you want to change, use the
..
. ,↑, ↓, +, and − keys to access the value and the ↵ key to select it. At
.
any time, you may press the .. key to return to the main menu.
6. At any time, you may press the PAUSE key twice to exit the configuration
menu and place the printer online. Once you have finished selecting all
your options, save your configuration.
IMPORTANT
If you do not save your configuration, all your new values will be lost
when you power off the printer.
Saving A Configuration
You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job
requirements.
The configurations are saved and stored in the printer and are not lost when
the printer is turned off.
NOTE: If the Protect Configs. option is enabled, the new configuration will not
be saved until the existing configuration is deleted.
Follow these steps to save a new configuration:
1. Press the
..
.
key until the following message displays:
MENU MODE
CONFIG. CONTROL
2. Press the ↓ key until the following message displays:
Save Config.
1*
3. Press the - or + key to cycle through the options (1-8). Note that the
factory default configuration is not listed.
4. When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays briefly:
Saving
Configuration
72
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration
When processing is completed, the display shows:
Save Config.
X*
NOTE: If the configuration number has been previously saved and Protect
Configs. = Enabled under CONFIG CONTROL, the following error
message displays:
CONFIG. EXISTS
Delete First
If the above occurs, see “Modifying A Saved Configuration” on page
74, step 4.
5. Print your configuration and store it in a safe place for future reference.
Refer to “Printing A Configuration” on page 75.
Specifying A Power-Up Configuration
You can specify which of the nine configurations (1-8 or Factory) will be the
power-up configuration:
1. Press the
..
.
key until the following message displays:
MENU MODE
CONFIG. CONTROL
2. Press the ↓ key until the following message displays:
Power-Up Config.
1*
3. Press the - or + key to cycle through the options (1-8 and Factory). When
the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The following
message displays:
Power-Up Config.
X*
NOTE: If the configuration number has not been saved previously, the
following error message displays:
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
If this error message displays, see “Saving A Configuration” on page
72. Once you have saved a configuration, repeat the steps in this
procedure.
73
Chapter
3
Overview
Modifying A Saved Configuration
You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it. For example, you
can modify Config. 1, shown below. Suppose you want to keep all the settings
but you want to select the parallel Centronics interface instead of the IEEE
1284 interface.
1. Load the configuration to be changed (for example, Config. 1).
a. Press the
..
.
key until the following message displays.
MENU MODE
CONFIG. CONTROL
b. Press the ↓ key until the following message displays.
Load Config.
Factory
c.
Press the + or - key to cycle through the options: Factory 1-8.
d. When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays:
Loading Saved
Configuration
Then, the following message displays when it is loaded:
Load Config.
X*
2. Move through the menu and change all the desired values. (In this
.
example, press the .. key until PARALLEL PORT displays. Press the ↓
key until Port Type/IEEE 1284 displays. Press the - key until Centronics
displays.)
3. Press the ↵ key to select each new value. An asterisk (*) displays.
4. Before saving the modified configuration, you must delete the original
configuration if the Protect Configs. option is enabled.
a. Press the ↑ or ↓ key until the following message displays:
Delete Config.
1*
b. Press the + or - key to cycle through the options (1-8). When the
desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The following
message is displayed.
Deleting
Configuration
74
Printing A Configuration
Then, the following displays when it is deleted:
Delete Config.
X*
5. Save the new configuration as described in the “Saving A Configuration”
on page 72. Make sure you select the same number (e.g., Config. 1)
when saving the modified configuration. The new configuration writes
over the existing one.
6. Print a copy of this newest configuration and store it in a safe place. Refer
to the “Printing A Configuration” on page 75.
Printing A Configuration
It is recommended that you print and store your configurations for future
reference. The printout provides a list of the parameters that were set when
you configured the printer.
To print a configuration:
1. Press the
..
.
key until the following message displays.
MENU MODE
CONFIG. CONTROL
2. Press the ↓ key until the following message displays:
Print Config.
Current*
3. Press the + or - key to cycle through the following printout options.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1-8 customized configurations
4. When the desired option displays, press the ↵ key. The printer prints the
specified configuration.
NOTE: If the configuration you want to print has not been saved, the
following message will display momentarily:
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved
under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot
be printed. You must either select another configuration to print or
load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first.
75
Chapter
3
Overview
Figure 3. Sample Configuration Printout
76
Sample Configuration Printout (cont.)
77
Chapter
3
Menu Overview
Menu Overview
VALIDATOR
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Online validator
setup and status
reporting.
Name, store, and
retrieve up to
eight different
printer
configurations.
Control various
parameters
related to print
quality, media,
and ribbon.
SELECTED
EMULATIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
PARALLEL
PORT
Emulations
selected from the
PRINTER
CONTROL menu
appear here.
These
emulations relate
to graphics
languages,
particular
printers, and
optional host
interface
protocols.
.
Press ..
Select various
printer tests,
monitor and
record printer
performance.
MEDIA
CONTROL
Select various
parallel port
related
parameters.
to select the next main menu.
Press ↓ or ↑ to move within each main menu.
78
CALIBRATE
CONTROL
Select the correct
media sensing
for the media
type installed and
perform media
sensor
calibration.
SERIAL
PORT
Select various
serial port related
parameters.
PRINTER
CONTROL
Select the
desired
emulations and
various printer
operating
parameters.
OPTIONAL
PORTS
Select optional
host interfaces.
Main Menu
VALIDATOR
(page 84)
Validator Report
Auto Report
Clear Data
Good Barcodes
Good Forms
Overstrike Forms
Average BWD
Last BWD
Validator Funct.
Telemetry Path
Telemetry Data
Number of Codes
Validator Action
Symbol Contrast
Quiet Zones
Decodeability
Percent Decode
Defects
Min. Code Height
Form Spacing
Skip Labels
F/W Revision
Overstrike Style
Scanner Settings
Beam Shift
I2of5 Checksum
Num Retry
CONFIG.
CONTROL
(page 91)
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Config 1
Name Config 2
Name Config 3
Name Config 4
Name Config 5
Name Config 6
Name Config 7
Name Config 8
Reset Cfg Names
MEDIA
CONTROL
(page 94)
Print Intensity
Print Speed
Print Mode
Media Handling
Paper Feed Shift
Label Length
Label Width
Ver Image Shift
Hor Image Shift
Orientation
Auto Map Select
Auto Label Width
Num Auto Labels
Slew Speed
Print Direction
Tear-Strip Time
Pre-Peel Mode
Pre-Peel Adjust
Clip Page
Error Recover
Ribbon Width
Display Ribbon
Ribbon Low
Rbn Takeup Full
Units
Set Label Length
Cutter Type
CALIBRATE
CONTROL
(page 108)
Gap/Mark Sensor
Auto Calibrate
Media Profile
Sensed Distance
Gap/Mark Thresh
Paper Out Thresh
Manual Calibrate
Pwr Up Auto-Cal
Online Auto-Cal
Gap Windowing
Gap Length
Cal in Peel Mode
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable Advanced
User (under PRINTER CONTROL).
.
Press ..
to select the next main menu.
Press ↓ or ↑ to move within each main menu.
Press + or - to cycle through each possible menu item value.
79
Chapter
3
Main Menu
PRINTER
CONTROL
(page 114)
LP+ Emulation
CTHI Emulation(1)
Active IGP Emul
Host Interface
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Display Language
Del Char frm Fls
Ld Char from Fls
Save Char to Fls
Del Char frm RAM
Ld Char at PwrUp
Del Set frm Flsh
Ld Set from Flsh
Save Set to Flsh
Del Set from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Alarm
Power-up State
Ptx Setup SFCC
Overwrite Files
View File List
Delete Files
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
Cancel Key
Compatibility
Advanced User
Auto Locking
Set Lock Key
Ptx Setup Parse
RAM Disk Size
Glob Mem Adjust
Max Cache Memory
Max Cached Char
Standard Chars.
Bold Chars.
Extra Bold Char.
Batch Counter
TWINAX
SETUP(1)(2)(3)
(page 131)
SPC COAX
SETUP(1)(2)(5)
(page 134)
Primary Sets
Translation Tbl(4)
Buffer Print
Twinax Type
Active Char Set
Secondary Sets
5225 World Trade
Cancel IGP/DCU
Lead-in Chars
Alt. Set 80-9F
Graphic Chek Err
Graphic Chek Cod
LAC Option
LAC Approx.
Set Text Orientn
Host Override
Format Control
Max. Print Width
SPC Type
Logical Buf Size
Intervention Req
Buffer Print
Translation Tbl
PA1
PA2
Buffer Reprint
Null Handling
SPC Null Supp
SPC Space Supp
SFCC Char
NL At MPP + 1
SPC TWINAX
SETUP(1)(2)(5)
(page 135)
IPDS SETUP(6)
COAX
SETUP(1)(2)(3)
(page 128)
Primary Sets
Translation Tbl
PA1
PA2
Buffer Reprint
Buffer Print
Coax Type
Active Char Set
Secondary Sets
Early Print Cmpl
SCS Buffer Cntrl
Alt. Set 80-9F
Intervention Req
CR At MPP + 1
NL At MPP + 1
Position Aft FF
Last Char = FF
Null Suppression
FF Validity
Auto Skip At End
FF After Job
CR, EM, & NL
Translate Table
Host Override
Format Control
Cancel IGP/DCU
Lead-in Chars
Change Case
Set Text Orientn
Max. Print Width
SPC Type
SFCC Char
SPC Char Set
Translation Tbl
Buffer Print
(page 136)
Default Font
Default Code Pag
Code Page Subset
Emulation
Early Print Comp
Host Form Length
Null Suppression
Page Rotation
VPA Check
Expanded Fonts
Hexdump mode
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable Advanced User (under PRINTER CONTROL).
1
Appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2
Appears only if selected as the Port Type (under C/T PORT).
3
Appears only if the CTHI emulation (under PRINTER CONTROL) is set to Standard.
4
Does not appear if the IPDS emulation is installed.
5 Appears
6
80
only if the CTHI emulation (under PRINTER CONTROL) is set to Simp Prot Conv.
Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed.
5250 SETUP(1)
(page 138)
Primary Sets
Translation Tbl(2)
Buffer Print
Active Char Set
Secondary Sets
Lead-in Chars
Alt. Set 80-9F
Graphic Chek Err
Graphic Chek Cod
Set Text Orientn
Host Override
Format Control
Max. Print Width
IGP/PGL
SETUP(3)
(page 140)
Character Group
Standard Sets
Select LPI
Define CR Code
Define LF Code
Autowrap
Auto Uppercase
Slash 0
Select SFCC
Host Form Length
Var Form Adjust
Var Form Type
Optimized Ratio
PI Slew Range
CR Edit
Skip Cmd Prefix
Ignore Text
Power on IGP/PGL
Ext Execute Copy
Al 00 Spaces
Select SO Char
Ignore Mode
Select Char
Do FF at TOF
IGP100 Compatbl.
Expanded Font
Scalable Size
Autoeject
PGL Normal
UPC Descenders
I-2/5 Selection
User-Def Ratio
Error Report
Repeat Form Opt
IGP/VGL
SETUP(3)
(page 142)
SFCC
Power-up ^X
Power-up ^F
Power-up ^PY
LPI
Btm Margin Ctl
Text Length
Autoeject
Copy Count
Host Form Length
Slash 0
Ignore Dots
Append Rotated
Truncate Alpha
True Vert 1/10
Absorb After ^PY
UPC Descenders
Select SO Char
Rot. Char Size
Ignore Spaces
Midline PY
Width Limit
Absorb After ^PN
Expanded Font
Auto FF at ^PN
Error Msgs
Error Markers
Offpage Errors
Barcode Errors
Ignore Chars
Ignore Ch#1
Ignore Ch#2
Data Bit 8
Cmd Resolution
^Dnn Dot Slew
Barcode var.
Character Group
Standard Sets
Uniform Fonts
Prop Line Length
Printer Pl
Host Pl
Max PI 16
P-SERIES
SETUP(4)
(page 145)
Select CPI
Select LPI
Typeface
Character Group
Character Set
Primary Subset
Extended Subset
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Prop. Spacing
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin(5)
Right Margin(5)
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Print Char. Set
Define CR code
Auto LF
Define LF code
Control Code 06
Control Code 08
Bold
Overstrike
Select SFCC
EVFU Select
Alt. Set 80-9F
SFCC d command
PSeries Dbl High
FF valid at TOF
Text Position
Host Command
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Form Length (inches)(5)
Form Length (mm)(5)
Form Length (lines)
Form Width (inches)(5)
Form Width (mm)(5)
Form Width (char.)
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable Advanced User (under PRINTER CONTROL).
1
Appears only if the TN5250 emulation is installed.
2
Does not appear if the IPDS emulation is installed.
3
The presence of these menu items depends on the Active IGP Emul selection (under PRINTER
CONTROL).
4 The
5
presence of these menu items depends on the LP+ Emulation selection (under PRINTER CONTROL).
Does not display when the CT emulation is selected.
81
Chapter
3
Main Menu
P-SER XQ
SETUP(1)
(page 148)
SER MATRIX
SETUP(1)
(page 150)
PROPRINTER
SETUP(1)
(page 152)
EPSON FX
SETUP(1)
(page 154)
Select CPI
Select LPI
Typeface
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Prop. Spacing
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin(2)
Right Margin(2)
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Print Char. Set
Define CR code
Auto LF
Define LF code
Control Code 06
Compressed Print
Bold
Elong/Alt. Font
Gothic Typeface
EVFU Select
Upr. Case Select
Slew Relative
Text Position
Host Command
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Form Length (inches)(2)
Form Length (mm)(2)
Form Length (lines)
Form Width (inches)(2)
Form Width (mm)(2)
Form Width (char.)
Select CPI
Select LPI
Typeface
Character Group
Character Set
Primary Subset
Extended Subset
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Prop. Spacing
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin(2)
Right Margin(2)
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Print Char. Set
Define CR code
Auto LF
Define LF code
Control Code 06
Bold
Overstrike
Printer Select
Alt. Set 80-9F
ESC d command
Text Position
Host Command
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Form Length (inches)(2)
Form Length (mm)(2)
Form Length (lines)
Form Width (inches)(2)
Form Width (mm)(2)
Form Width (char.)
Select CPI
Select LPI
Typeface
Character Group
Character Set
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Prop. Spacing
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin(2)
Right Margin(2)
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Print Char. Set
Define CR code
Auto LF
Define LF code
20 CPI Condensed
Bold
FF valid at TOF
Alt. Char Set
Text Position
Host Command
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Form Length (inches)(2)
Form Length (mm)(2)
Form Length (lines)
Form Width (inches)(2)
Form Width (mm)(2)
Form Width (char.)
Select CPI
Select LPI
Typeface
Character Group
Character Set
Epson Set
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Prop. Spacing
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin(2)
Right Margin(2)
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Print Char. Set
Define CR code
Auto LF
Define LF code
Printer Select
20 CPI Condensed
Bold
Alt. Set 80-9F
Text Position
Host Command
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Form Length (inches)(2)
Form Length (mm)(2)
Form Length (lines)
Form Width (inches)(2)
Form Width (mm)(2)
Form Width (char.)
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable Advanced User (under PRINTER CONTROL).
1
The presence of these menu items depends on the LP+ Emulation selection (under PRINTER
CONTROL).
2
Does not display when the CT emulation is selected.
82
DIAGNOSTICS
(page 200)
Printer Tests
Test Count
Software Build
Hex Dump Mode
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
DRAM Installed
Ptr On Time
Ptr Media Dist
Head Print Dist
Head On Time
Reset Head Data
Head Type
Head Voltage
PARALLEL
PORT
(page 204)
SERIAL
PORT
(page 208)
C/T PORT(2)
Port Type
Data Bit 8 (1)
PI Ignored (1)
Buffer Size in K
Trickle Time
Timeout
Report Status
Prime Signal
Data Polarity (1)
Resp. Polarity (1)
Busy on Strobe (1)
Latch Data On (1)
Port Type
Baud Rate
Word Length
Stop Bits
Parity
Data Protocol
Buffer Size in K
Trickle Time
Timeout
Report Status
Data Term Ready
Request to Send
Poll Character
Poll Response
Idle Response
One Char Enquiry
Printer Status
Framing Errors
Port Type
Device Address
Image Buf Size
Timeout
Report Status
(page 216)
ETHERNET
PARAMS(3)
(page 218)
IP Address
Gateway Address
Subnet Mask
MAC Address
Novell Protocol
Nest Serv Type
NetBIOS Protocol
Novell Frame
ASCII Data Port
IPDS Data Port(4)
Keep Alive Timer
Ethernet Speed(5)
DHCP
Job Control
NOTES:
Italicized items are available only when you enable Advanced User (under PRINTER CONTROL).
1
Available only when the Centronics option is enabled (in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT).
2
Appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
3
Appears only if an Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) is installed.
4
Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed.
5
Appears only if a NIC is installed.
83
Chapter
3
VALIDATOR
VALIDATOR
VALIDATOR
Validator Report
Auto Report
Disable*
Enable
Clear Data
Good Barcodes
0
Good Forms
0
Overstrike Forms
0
Average BWD
0%
Last BWD
0%
Validator Funct.
Disable*
Telemetry Path
Disabled*
Serial Port
Network Port
Telemetry Data
Short Report*
Full Report
Validation Mode
Number of Codes
Auto*
1-99
Validator Action
Retry Form*
Symbol Contrast
Enable*
Disable
Quiet Zones
Enable*
Disable
Decodeability
37%*
30-90%
Percent Decode
60%*
0-99%
Defects
20%*
0-100%
Continued at the top of next page
84
Enable
Stop
Overstrike
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when
you enable Advanced User (in the
PRINTER CONTROL menu).
VALIDATOR
(cont. from previous page)
Min. Code Height
Form Spacing
Skip Labels
0.40 inches*
0.13 inches
0.25 inches
0.32 inches
0.6 inches*
Minimum*
0.16 inches
0.20 inches
0.2 to 1.7 inches
Maximum
F/W Revision
Overstrike Style
Scanner Settings
Grid*
Grey
Checkerboard
4xx, 6yy, 8zz* (1)
Beam Shift
0*
-99 to 99
I2of5 Checksum
Disable*
Enable
Num Retry
5*
3
4
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you
enable Advanced User (in the PRINTER
CONTROL menu).
1
Depends on printer model and custom files.
xx, yy, zz = file revision numbers.
85
Chapter
3
VALIDATOR
VALIDATOR Submenus
Validator Report
This item invokes an action. When selected the printer will print a report of the
verification data acquired since the last data reset.
Auto Report
This option allows you to disable or enable an automatic validator report
printout after a batch job. You can determine the end of a batch job in two
ways:
•
•
by using an Execute command to determine end of batch job, or
a timeout of more than 10 seconds.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Clear Data
This item initiates an action. When selected the printer will reset all defined
validator counters. This action must be confirmed before the action is taken.
Good Barcodes
This is a display item only. It indicates the number of bar code reports sent
from the validator since the last data clear operation. After a clear operation
the value is shown as zero.
Good Forms
This is a display item only. It indicates the number of good forms printed since
the last data clear operation. A form is defined by the current height as set in
the menus. After a clear operation the value is shown as zero.
Overstrike Forms
This is a display item only. It indicates the number of overstrike/bad forms that
contained a bar code that fell below the minimum acceptable level since the
last data clear operation. If no data has been received since the last clear
operation, this field will be zero.
Average BWD
This is a display item only. It indicates the average of all bar width deviations
reported since the last reset. If no data has been received since the last clear
operation, this field will be zero.
86
VALIDATOR Submenus
Last BWD
This is a display item only. It indicates the Bar Width Deviation included in the
most recent report received from the validator. If no data has been received
since the last clear operation, this field will be zero.
Validator Funct.
This item allows the validator to be disabled when desired. When disabled,
the printer will not command the validator to begin scanning and no errors will
be reported. The counters will not be incremented while the validator is
disabled.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Telemetry Path
This submenu allows you to select whether or not the printer will output the
bar code analysis and underlying data from the On Line Validator. To enable
this data, you must select the port through which the data will be transmitted.
The options are Disabled (the factory default), Serial Port, and Network Port.
Telemetry Data
This submenu selects the type and amount of data the validator will report to
the printer and subsequently the data the printer will make available through
the telemetry report.
•
Short Report. Provides the encoded failure cause or pass indication, and
the percent bar width deviation.
•
Full Report. Provides nearly all the data captured by the validator. This
report can be fed directly to the RJS analysis software for capture and
review.
•
Validation Mode. Provides the same data as the Short Report, but adds
the actual bar code data read.
The factory default is Short Report.
Number of Codes
This submenu tells the printer how many codes to expect on a form. It is
required in conditions where the host sends bit mapped graphics to the printer
to produce bar codes. Therefore, the printer does not know how many codes
to expect and cannot tell when a code is skipped. With this figure set to a
specific number, the printer can check after a form has printed and passed the
validator, whether or not it has received enough analysis reports. If it does not
have at least as many reports as it expects, it can assume a gross bar code
failure. When Auto is selected, the printer will only expect as many bar code
analysis reports as bar codes printed using printer bar code commands.
The options are Auto (the factory default) and 1-99.
87
Chapter
3
VALIDATOR
Validator Action
This submenu defines the action the printer will take in the event of an error.
See the Validator User’s Manual for details.
The options are Retry Form (the factory default), Stop, and Overstrike.
Symbol Contrast
This item selects whether or not symbol contrast is included as part of the
pass fail criteria. The precise percentage to be sent to the validator is
determined by the type of printing selected. See the table below:
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
Disable
= 0%
Thermal Transfer
= 40%
Direct Thermal
= 30%
Quiet Zones
This submenu enables or disables all checking of the quiet zone.
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
Decodeability
This submenu is only available in the Advanced Menus and is used for
adjustment of the pass/fail criteria.
The range is 30-90%, and the factory default is 37%.
Percent Decode
This submenu is only available in the Advanced Menus and is used for
adjustment of the pass/fail criteria.
The range is 0-99%, and the factory default is 60%.
Defects
Defects are voids found in bars or spots found in the spaces or quiet zones of
the bar codes. Voids, spots, smudges, and other defects in bar code symbols
can yield poor scanning results, and will yield lower verification results.
Increasing the defects value will allow more defects per barcode before
issuing a fail message.
This submenu is only available in the Advanced Menus and is used for
adjustment of the pass/fail criteria.
The range is 0-100%, and the factory default is 20%.
88
VALIDATOR Submenus
Min. Code Height
This submenu tells the printer the closest vertical gap between bar codes that
needs to be resolved. Refer to the Print/Slew Speed Limits for background
information. The printer’s ability to resolve which form contains the bad bar
code, is a function of print speed and the closeness of bar codes on separate
forms. The default setting can resolve very small forms, but limits print speed.
If you know that the bar codes are far enough apart and far enough from the
bottom of a form, you can increase this value with this menu to allow for faster
printing.
The options are 0.40 inches (the factory default), 0.13 inches, 0.16 inches,
0.20 inches, 0.25 inches, and 0.32 inches.
Form Spacing
This submenu tells the printer how large the gap is between the bottom of the
last bar code on the form and the bottom of the first bar code on the next form.
The spacing range is 0.2 to 1.7 inches adjusted in 1/10 inch segments.
The factory default at 0.6 inches.
Skip Labels
This submenu allows you to select the number of labels skipped after an
Overstrike occurs. Minimum is 0 to 1 label. Maximum is 1 to 2 labels.
The options are Minimum (the factory default) and Maximum.
F/W Revision
This is a display item only. It indicates the firmware version of the Validator.
Overstrike Style
This submenu allows you to select different overstrike styles on bad labels.
The options are Grid (the factory default), Grey, and Checkerboard.
Scanner Settings
This option has two purposes:
•
Allows the validator to upload an optimized setting for a particular printer
model at power up. This will use the full scanner beam width and improve
the performance and efficiency of the validator.
•
Allows you to customize a special scanner setting for a specific
application. The file can then be downloaded to the printer by using
normal printer download modes, and must be saved as part of the power
up configuration.
The factory default depends on the printer model and custom files.
89
Chapter
3
VALIDATOR
Beam Shift
This option enables you to shift the beam horizontally to the left or right. The
left edge of the beam should be 0.13 inch to the left of the left edge of the tear
bar. After you set this value, save it as part of the configuration for future use.
The range is from -99 to 99, and the factory default is 0.
I2of5 Checksum
This option allows you to include or exclude the checksum option in I2of5 as
part of the grading. For example, if this option is set as enabled, then any
incoming barcode data without checksum digits will be graded as failure and
CHECKSUM FAILURE will display on the LCD.
The factory default is Disable.
Num Retry
This option allows you to set a number of retries for overstrike before the
printer stops.
The options are 3, 4, and 5, and the factory default is 5.
90
VALIDATOR Submenus
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
Factory*
1-8
Save Config.
1*
1-8
Print Config.
Current*
Factory
Delete Config.
1*
1-8
Power-Up Config.
Factory*
1-8
Protect Configs.
Disable*
Enable
1*
1-8
Power-Up
All
1-8
Name Config 1
Name Config 2
Name Config 3
Name Config 4
Name Config 5
Name Config 6
Name Config 7
Name Config 8
Reset Cfg Names
All
* = Factory Default
91
Chapter
3
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL Submenus
Load Config.
The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
The factory default is Factory.
Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in
memory, and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs.
parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the
existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration
cannot be changed. See “Saving A Configuration” on page 72 for details.
The factory default is 1.
Print Config.
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations. It
is recommended you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for
quick referral.
The options are Current (the factory default), Factory, Power-Up, and All.
Delete Config.
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory
default configuration cannot be deleted.
The factory default is 1.
Power-Up Config.
You can specify which of the eight configurations will be the power-up
configuration.
The factory default is Factory.
Protect Configs.
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When
disabled (default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
92
CONFIG. CONTROL Submenus
Name Config (1-8)
You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer to a
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.
menus. The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
When you move into the Name Configs. menu, the top line of the display
shows the current configuration name. The second line of the display is
initially the same as the top line. You can modify the second line of the display
without affecting the top line until the ↵ key is pressed, which sets the
modified name as the current selection.
Press the ↑ or ↓ keys to cycle through the values available for that character
at the cursor location. Press the + key to move to the next character to be
modified. Press the - key to go back to a character you have already modified.
Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this
configuration, then press ↵ to save. The name you entered will now represent
this configuration on the printer's front panel. To exit this menu without saving,
press any key other than the ↵ key. The configuration name will revert to the
last saved value.
The factory default is 1.
Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number.
The options are 1-8 and All, and the factory default is 1.
93
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
MEDIA CONTROL
MEDIA CONTROL
Print Intensity
-3*
-15 to 15
Print Speed
6 ips*
2-10 ips(1)
Print Mode
Transfer*
Direct
Media Handling
Continuous*
Tear-Off Strip
Tear-Off
Paper Feed Shift
0.00 inches* (2)
-0.50 to X inches(5)
Label Length
4 or 6 inches* (2)(3)
00.1 to 99.0 inches(4)
Label Width
4.1, 6.6, or 8.5 inches* (2)(3)
0.00 inches* (2)
-1.00 to X inches(5)
Hor Image Shift
0.00 inches* (2)
-1.00 to 1.00 inches
Auto Map Select
Auto Label Width
Portrait*
Disable*
Cut
00.1 to 8.5 inches(3)
Ver Image Shift
Orientation
Peel-Off
Landscape
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Landscape
Enable
4.1, 6.6, or 8.5 inches* (2)(3)
00.1 to 8.5 inches(3)
Notes:
Num Auto Labels
2 labels*
1-40 labels(3)
Slew Speed
6 ips* (2)
2-10 ips
Print Direction
Head First*
Foot First
Tear-Strip Time
1 seconds*
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL
menu).
1
Maximum value depends on the width of the
printer model and printhead.
2
You can change the unit value from inches to
millimeters under Units (in MEDIA CONTROL)
when Advanced User is enabled.
1-60 seconds
3 Maximum
value depends on the width of the
printer model (see Appendix A, “Specifications”).
Continued at the top of next page
94
4
Maximum value depends on model width and
size of DRAM installed (see Appendix A,
“Specifications”).
5
Current value setting for Label Length (submenu
in MEDIA CONTROL Menu) up to a maximum of
12.80 inches.
CONFIG. CONTROL Submenus
MEDIA CONTROL
(cont. from previous page)
Pre-Peel Mode
Pre-Peel Adjust
Disable*
Enable
1.00 inches*
0.00 to 2.00 inches
Clip Page
Enable*
Disable
Error Recover
Disable*
Enable
Ribbon Width
Same as Paper*
Set in Menu
Display Ribbon
Enable*
Disable
Ribbon Low
Disable*
25 m
Rbn Takeup Full
Enable*
Disable
Units
In Inches*
In Millimeters
Set Label Length
Manual*
Automatic
Cutter Type
Heavy-Duty*
Standard
50 m
75 m
100 m
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you
enable Advanced User (in the PRINTER
CONTROL menu).
95
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Print Intensity
This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used
for the type of media and ribbon installed.
Large numbers imply more heat (thermal energy) to be applied for each dot.
This has a significant effect on print quality. The print intensity and speed
must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality
and barcode grades.
The range is -15 through +15:
•
•
The factory default is -3 in Transfer mode.
The factory default is 0 in Direct Thermal mode.
Print Speed
This option specifies the speed in inches per second (ips) at which the media
passes through the printer while printing.
The range is 2 through 10 ips (in increments of 1 ips).
The factory default is 6 ips.
NOTE: The maximum print speed varies based on maximum printer width
and dot per inch (dpi) resolution of the printhead installed (203 or
300 dpi). See Table 16 on page 269.
Print Mode
This option specifies the type of printing to be done.
•
•
Transfer. Indicates Thermal Transfer printing (ribbon installed).
Direct. Indicates Direct Thermal printing (no ribbon) and requires special
heat sensitive media.
The factory default is Transfer.
Media Handling
This option specifies how the printer will handle the media (labels or tag
stock).
96
•
•
Continuous. Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front.
•
Tear-Off. After each label is printed, the printer positions the label over
the tear bar and waits for you to tear-off the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). A “Remove Label” message will display to
remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed.
Tear-Off Strip. Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front until
the print buffer is empty, then positions the last label over the tear bar for
removal.
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
•
Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). The label liner is rewound on the internal
rewinder. A “Remove Label” message will display to remind you to
remove the label before the next one can be printed.
•
Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or can cut after a specified number of
labels have been printed using a software cut command. It cuts
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
The factory default is Continuous.
Paper Feed Shift
This option represents the distance to advance a label (+ shift) or pull back
(– shift) when the Tear-Off Strip, Tear-Off, Peel-Off, or Cut media handling
option is enabled. The allowable range is -0.50 inches to the current Label
Length value setting up to a maximum of 12.80 inches in .01 inch increments.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
Label Length
This option specifies the user-selected Label Length in inches or millimeters.
In most applications this user-selected Label Length will match the Physical
label length. Physical label length is the actual label length of the media
installed.
When setting label length, consider the following:
Label Length can be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA
CONTROL menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software
command.
A Host Forms Length (Label Length) value sent from the host computer will
override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu.
•
Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label. The
following list of different media types explains how the physical label
lengths are determined:
•
Die-cut labels – measurable length of the removable label (leading
edge to trailing edge). This does not include the liner material or gap.
•
Tag Stock with notches or holes – measurable length from the trailing
edge of one notch or hole to the trailing edge of the next notch or
hole.
•
Tag Stock with black marks on underside – measurable length from
the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next
black mark.
•
Continuous media (no label length indicators) – measurable length
should be within + 1-2% the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software command.
97
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
•
Logical Label Length (Host Forms Length) is the length that the user or
programmer bases his printable image on. In most cases this length
should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length. This allows the
entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length
indicators (gaps, notches, holes or black marks).
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Enable (in the MEDIA CONTROL menu), the printer will
clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label
length. In this case, the printable data that was not printed will be lost.
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Disable, the printer will continue to print the image onto
the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label
length value set in the MEDIA CONTROL menu.
When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length, the
printer will print the entire image and leave blank space the remaining
length of the physical label as it advances to the Top-of-Form of the next
label. This is true regardless of the Clip Page setting.
The allowable Label Length range is 00.1 to 99.0 inches (2.5 - 2514.6mm)
The factory defaults are listed below:
Table 2. Factory Default Label Length
Printer
Inches
mm
Lines
T5X04
6”
152.4
36
T5X06
4”
101.6
24
T5X08
6”
152.4
36
Maximum Label Length range is dependent on the Label Width value
selected, printhead installed (203 or 300 DPI), and the amount of DRAM
installed in the printer. See Appendix A for specifications.
Label Width
This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed. The value
can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units
submenu under the MEDIA CONTROL menu. The allowable range in inches
is 00.1 to the maximum print width of the printer. The allowable range in
millimeters is 2.5 to the maximum width of the printer.
The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed.
98
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Ver Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up (-) or down (+)
for precise positioning on the label. The actual height of the image is not
affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 inches to the current
Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12.80 inches in .01 inch
increments.
The factory default value in inches is 0.00 inches.
Hor Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left (-) or right
(+) for precise positioning on the label. The actual width of the image is not
affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 through +1.00 inches
in .01 inch increments, displayed as xx/100. The factory default value in
inches is 0.00.
Orientation
This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the
label.
Portrait. Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the height of a
page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is parallel to the
leading edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with
the operator viewing the front of the printer.
4”
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
leading edge of
the media.
•
6”
Leading Edge
99
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
•
Inv. Portrait. Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the
height of a page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is
parallel to the trailing edge of the media. The following illustration is an
example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.
Trailing Edge
4”
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
trailing edge of the
media.
6”
Leading Edge
•
Landscape. Landscape refers to horizontal orientation, where the width
of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the image is the left
edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with the
operator viewing the front of the printer.
4”
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the left
edge of the media.
FEED
6”
Leading Edge
•
Inv. Landscape. Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation,
where the width of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the
image is the right edge of the media (the left edge of the image is the
trailing edge of the media). The following illustration is an example, with
the operator viewing the front of the printer.
4”
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the right
edge of the media.
FEED
Leading Edge
The factory default is Portrait.
100
6”
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Auto Map Select
This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application.
The IGP/Auto Label Mapping® feature allows backward compatibility of
programs written for P5000 line-matrix printers using the Printronix PGL
graphics language. It allows the printer to print two-up (or other multi-up)
labels. Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer, it prints the
leftmost label and the rightmost label, so the printout will be twice as long but
half as wide.
When enabled, the printer will automatically reposition the horizontally
adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent position, or a combination of horizontal
and vertical positions based on the values selected under the Auto Label
Width and Num Auto Labels menu items.
When disabled, excess data in any program sent to the printer with
horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical page width of the printer
will be clipped or wrapped depending upon the setting of the Autowrap menu
option.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Examples
All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the
label length.
Example 1: Simple Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels
for a printer with a physical width of 8”. The user now desires to use this file
with a printer that has a 4” physical width.
Solution: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of the label),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation: The printer will print the first (leftmost) 4” label first. Once
the first label has been completed, the printer will print the second 4” label.
These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form.
Thermal Printer Output
Line-Matrix Printer Output
Label 1
Label 1
Label 2
Label 2
Wide Web Width
Narrow
Web
Width
101
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
Example 2: Uneven Number Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4”
physical width.
Solution #1: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of two labels),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #1: The printer will print the first two labels at
the same time. These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent. Once these
labels have been completed, the printer will print the remaining 2” labels along
with a blank 2” label.
File Contents:
Label
1
Label
2
Print Output:
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Blank
Label
Solution #2: The user sets Auto Label Width to 2”, configures the Num Auto
Labels to 3, and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #2: The printer will print the first 2” label by
itself, the second 2” label by itself, and finally, the last 2” label by itself.
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
102
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Example 3: Past Maximum File Width
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 8”
physical width. The user should have used a solution similar to one of the
solutions in the section above, but the user erroneously enters an Auto Label
Width of 12” and a Num Auto Labels of 3.
Printer Operation: Maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/12”) = 1.67 rounded up
to 2. The printer will automatically reduce the Num Auto Labels to 2.
Example 4: Blank Label Case
Problem: A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels. The user now
desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4” physical width. The user
decides to set the Num Labels to 3 and the Label Width to 4” despite the fact
that these values are not optimum.
Printer Operation: The maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/4”) = 5. The
selected value of 3 is legal. After the file is sent, the printer will begin by
printing the first 4” width label. Once that label is complete, it will print the
second 4” width label. Finally, once both of those labels have been printed,
the printer will print a blank 4” label.
File Contents:
Label
1
Label
2
Print Output:
Label
1
Label
2
Blank
Label
Auto Label Width
The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media
that will be used for the print file. The value is selectable from 00.1 inch
through the maximum print width of the printer.
NOTE: The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current
MEDIA CONTROL/Label Width value selected in the configuration
menu.
The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed.
103
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
Num Auto Labels
The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form.
The value is selectable with a range of 1 through 40 (T5X04), 1 through 21
(T5X06) and 1 through 17 (T5X08).
The factory default is 2.
Slew Speed
This option selects the speed at which media will be advanced after the
printer determines there is no more data to be printed on a label.
The range is 2-10 ips, and the factory default is 6 ips.
Print Direction
This option determines the basic print image orientation.
NOTE: Print Direction will not change the orientation of any print test patterns
in the DIAGNOSTIC Main Menu.
Print Direction has two options:
•
•
Head First
Foot First
For example, with Portrait orientation, when you select Head First, the top-ofform will come out of the printer first. Conversely, when you select Foot First,
the bottom-of-form will come out first.
FEED
A
A
Head First
Foot First
The Print Direction and Orientation are two independent options that can be
combined to produce the following results depending on the Active IGP
Emulation:
Table 3. Head First
104
Print Direction
Option
Orientation Option
Result in Active IGP Emulations
(IGP/PGL or IGP/VGL)
Head First
Portrait
Portrait
Head First
Landscape
Landscape
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Table 3. Head First
Print Direction
Option
Orientation Option
Result in Active IGP Emulations
(IGP/PGL or IGP/VGL)
Head First
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Portrait
Head First
Inv. Landscape
Inv. Landscape
Table 4. Foot First
Print Direction
Option
Orientation Option
Result in Active IGP/PPI1
Emulation
Foot First
Portrait
Portrait
Foot First
Landscape
Inv. Landscape
Foot First
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Portrait
Foot First
Inv. Landscape
Landscape
The factory default is Head First when IGP/PGL or IGP/VGL is enabled.
The factory default is Foot First when PPI1 is enabled.
Tear-Strip Time
When using Tear-Off Media Handling, Tear-Strip Time specifies the number
of seconds after the buffer is empty that the printer will wait before it advances
media to the tear bar position.
The range is 1-60 seconds, and the factory default is 1 second.
Pre-Peel Mode
•
•
Disable.
Enable. When using Peel-Off Media Handling, enabling Pre-Peel Mode
adds a forward and reverse motion to each label prior to printing. The
added forward pre-peel motion temporarily breaks the die cut label from
the liner, and the reverse motion places the label back on the liner prior to
printing, peeling, or dispensing the label. Pre-Peel Mode is usually
enabled only when using die cut labels with an aggressive adhesive that
makes automatic label removal from the liner difficult.
The factory default is Disable.
Pre-Peel Adjust
Pre-Peel Adjust represents the selectable distance that the label advances
during Pre-Peel Mode. The Pre-Peel Adjust distance selected is automatically
used when Pre-Peel Mode is enabled.
The range is 0.00 to 2.00 inches in .01 inch increments.
The factory default is 1.00 inch.
105
Chapter
3
MEDIA CONTROL
Clip Page
This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for
one physical page length when using gap or black mark media.
•
Enable. When the user selected page length is greater than the physical
page length, the printer clips the excess data to fit the physical page. The
excess data is lost. The media sensor will constantly look for the gap,
notch, hole, or black mark and when detected, will use it as the Top-ofForm position for the next label and clip any remaining data from the label
being printed.
•
Disable. When the user selected page length (logical length) is greater
than the physical page length dictated by the gap, notch, hole, or black
mark on media, the printer continues to print the remaining excess data
onto the next physical page.
The media sensor will look for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark only
after the media has advanced the distance specified by the Label Length
value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or by the Host Forms Length value
sent via software. Any gaps, notches, holes, or black marks that exist
prior to reaching the Label Length or Host Forms Length value will be
ignored.
The factory default is Enable.
Error Recover
This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when
an error occurred.
•
Disable. The printer will not reprint the label that was printing when the
error condition occurred.
•
Enable. The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error
condition occurred.
The factory default is Disable.
Ribbon Width
When Same As Paper is selected, the printer automatically adjusts the ribbon
operating parameters to match the installed media width. In those cases
where the media width is less than the installed ribbon width, the Set In Menu
option should be selected. After selection, the ribbon width is set to the proper
value by pressing the ↓ key and choosing the actual ribbon width using the +
and - keys. The chosen width is then selected by pressing the ↵ key. The
factory default is Same As Paper.
Display Ribbon
When enabled, the remaining length of unused ribbon will be displayed on the
LCD when in the online mode.
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
106
MEDIA CONTROL Submenus
Ribbon Low
This menu item defines the Ribbon Low condition for the ribbon supply
spindle. When set to a specific value from the available ranges (25, 50, 75,
100m), a ribbon low message will be displayed along with a flashing ONLINE
status indicator when the length of ribbon remaining on the ribbon supply
spindle has reached that value. The indicator will continue to flash until the
ribbon supply is exhausted. When Disabled, no ribbon low condition will be
indicated. A Ribbon Low condition will not prevent printing.
The options are Disable, 25m, 50m, 75m, and 100m.
The factory default is Disable.
Rbn Takeup Full
This enables or disables a fault message to display for a Ribbon Takeup Full
condition.
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
Units
This menu item selects either millimeters or inches as the unit of measure.
The options are In Inches (the factory default) and In Millimeters.
Set Label Length
This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto
or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length value in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu.
•
Manual: The Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto or Manual
Calibrate will not override or change the Label Length value.
•
Automatic: When an Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the Sensed
Distance value derived from either calibrate will override and change the
Label Length value. If no Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the
current Label Length value will be used.
The factory default is Manual.
NOTE: We do not recommend using Automatic when Gap/Mark Sensor =
Gap, as the Sensed Distance derived from a calibrate is equal to the
length of one label plus one gap. The added gap length will provide
too long a Label Length value.
Cutter Type
•
•
Heavy-Duty.
Standard.
The factory default is Heavy-Duty.
107
Chapter
3
CALIBRATE CTRL
CALIBRATE CTRL
CALIBRATE CTRL
Gap/Mark Sensor
Disable*
Auto Calibrate
Run Calibrate
Media Profile
Print Profile
Mark
Sensed Distance
0.00 inches(1)
Gap/Mark Thresh
171*
000-255
Paper Out Thresh
250*
000-255
Manual Calibrate
Run Calibrate
Pwr Up Auto-Cal
Disable*
Enable
Online Auto-Cal
Disable*
Enable
Gap Windowing
Disable*
Enable
Gap Length
0.12 inches*
Cal in Peel Mode
Disable*
Gap
0.05 - 1.00 inches
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
108
When Advanced User is enabled (in the PRINTER
CONTROL menu), you can change the unit value
to millimeters: Under the Units submenu (in the
MEDIA CONTROL menu), enable the “In
Millimeters” option.
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
Gap/Mark Sensor
The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top-ofForm position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches, holes or
black marks).
•
Disable: Selected when using media with no label length indicators (no
gaps, notches, holes or black marks), or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
•
Mark: Selected when using media that has horizontal black marks located
on the underside of the label liner or tag stock. The Top-of-Form position
will be the leading edge of the black mark.
•
Gap: Selected when using media with a liner space between die-cut
labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length
indicators. The Top-of-Form position will be the leading edge of the die
cut label (trailing edge of the gap, notch or hole).
NOTE: When Disable is selected, the label length will be based on the Label
Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value
sent via host software command.
The factory default is Disable.
Auto Calibrate
This feature is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the Media
Sensor in detecting gaps, notches, holes or black marks on the installed
media, as well as a paper out condition.
Auto Calibrate can be initiated within; TEST PRINT, the CALIBRATE CTRL
menu or the DIAGNOSTIC menu by pressing the ↵ (ENTER) key with “Auto
Calibrate” displayed. The printer will then advance media the distance needed
to accurately detect the label length indicators, then stop at the Top-of-Form
position and momentarily display the Sensed Distance. The process takes a
few seconds to complete. The end result will be a change to the Gap/Mark
Threshold, Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance values that the printer
will use. The changes in values take effect immediately within the current
configuration menu.
Auto Calibrate is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance
displayed, correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is
selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge
of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (one label + one gap). When
Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the
leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches.
109
Chapter
3
CALIBRATE CTRL
Media Profile
This feature provides a graphical printout showing the relationship of the
Paper Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark Threshold. The profile printout
assists the user in setting the thresholds for difficult media. This includes preprinted labels, and labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
When selected, the printer will advance media and print the media profile
along the length of each label. The printer will continue to print the profile until
the ENTER key is pressed.
The factory default is Print Profile.
Sensed Distance
This value (in inches) represents the distance that was sensed between the
TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label. With gapped media installed the
distance equals the physical label length + one gap, notch or hole (trailing
edge of one gap, notch or hole to the trailing edge of the next gap, notch or
hole). With black mark media installed the distance equals the leading edge of
one black mark to the leading edge of the next. This value is automatically
determined only after successful completion of Auto or Manual Calibrate and
cannot be changed manually.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
Gap/Mark Thresh
This menu item sets a value that, when exceeded by the output of the media
sensor, is recognized by the printer as a gap (or black mark). When Auto or
Manual Paper Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
gap/mark threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable Top-Of-Form detection, e.g., when using unusual
media, the Gap/Mark Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000-255, and the factory default is 171.
Paper Out Thresh
This menu item selects a value that, when exceeded by the output of the
media sensor, is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition. When
Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
paper out threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable paper out detection, e.g., when using non-standard
media, the Paper Out Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000-255, and the factory default is 250.
110
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
Manual Calibrate
Manual Calibrate is another method of improving the printer’s Media Sensing
and is only used when Auto Calibrate has failed or the Gap/Mark Threshold or
Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do not improve the
media sensor’s gap or mark sensing capability.
Manual Calibrate is initiated within the CALIBRATE CTRL menu by pressing
the ENTER key with “Manual Calibrate” displayed. The user will then be
prompted via the control panel display on what steps to take.
Example: “REMOVE RBN&MEDIA/Press Enter” or “LOAD RBN ONLY/Press
Enter” etc. During the last stage of Manual Calibrate the printer uses the
statically derived values, advances media and stops at the Top-of- Form
position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance. The process takes
longer than Auto Calibrate and the end result will be a change to the Gap/
Mark Threshold, Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance values that the
printer will use. The changes in values take effect immediately within the
current configuration menu.
Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed
Distance correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected
the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one
gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (or one label + one gap). When Mark
is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading
edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Manual Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches.
Pwr Up Auto-Cal
•
•
Disable.
Enable. When the printer is first powered on, it will complete its
initialization and self-tests and then perform an Auto Calibrate. Once the
Auto Calibrate is complete the printer will momentarily display the Sensed
Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate.
The factory default is Disable.
111
Chapter
3
CALIBRATE CTRL
Online Auto-Cal
NOTE: Online Auto-Cal will not function when the validator is enabled or
when Error Recover (under MEDIA CONTROL) is enabled (see page
106).
The options for Online Auto-Cal are:
•
•
Disable.
Enable. Whenever the printer is brought online, it automatically performs
an Auto Calibrate (see “Auto Calibrate” on page 109). Once the Auto
Calibrate is complete, the printer momentarily displays the Sensed
Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate and then resumes printing any
pending jobs.
NOTE: If using the Online Auto-Cal feature, you must first enable it prior to
printing any data.
The factory default is Disable.
Gap Windowing
This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and
troughs that may appear within the gap length in media. These edges or
peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the
next label (top-of-form). Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following
problems:
•
•
Loss of one or more complete (serialized) labels.
•
Top part of an image lost when printing in head-first orientation.
Start of an image printed in the middle of a gap, especially with fanfold,
perforated media.
The options for Gap Windowing are Enable and Disable:
•
Enable. When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the printer ignores
the first 90% of the gap length value specified in the Gap Length menu
option. The result is that cross perforations or unusual media
discrepancies within the gap are filtered out, allowing the printer to
reliably detect the actual leading edge of the next label and use it as the
TOF position.
•
Disable. When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the printer
continuously looks for the leading edge of the next label and uses it as the
TOF position. Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within the gap
can cause inaccurate TOF detection.
The factory default is Disable.
Gap Length
Gap Length is the actual length (height) of a label gap measured in .01 inch
increments. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
NOTE: You must enter the correct Gap Length. If the Gap Length is too long,
the image will shift down from the leading edge (TOF) of the label.
The factory default is 0.12 inches.
112
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
Cal in Peel Mode
This option allows you to perform a calibration (Auto Calibrate or Pwr Up
Auto-Cal) in Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
•
Enable. Auto Calibrate can be performed from the front panel, and if the
Pwr Up Auto-Cal option is enabled, calibration will be performed at power
up.
NOTE: Calibration in Peel-Off mode does not stop and wait for you to remove
peeled labels. Therefore, be prepared to remove the labels as they
are automatically peeled.
•
Disable. The printer will not permit calibration and a
“CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable Peel-Off” message will briefly display.
Additionally, if “Pwr Up Auto-Cal” is enabled, the printer will not perform
calibration at power up.
The factory default is Disable.
113
Chapter
3
PRINTER CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL
LP+ Emulation
CTHI Emulation(1)
Active IGP Emul
Host Interface
Power Saver Time
P-Series*
page 145
Standard*
IGP/PGL*
P-Series XQ
page 148
Serial Matrix
page 150
Proprinter XL
page 152
Epson FX
page 154
Simp Prot Conv
IGP/VGL
Auto Switching*
Centronics(2)
Serial
Twinax(1)
Coax(1)
Ethernet(3)
15 minutes*
30 minutes
45 minutes
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
Pwr Save Control
Enable*
Disable
Display Language
English*
German
French
IEEE 1284(2)
60 minutes
240 minutes
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
Del Char frm Fls
Ld Char from Fls
Save Char to Fls
Del Char frm RAM
Ld Char at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Del Set frm Flsh
Italicized items are available only when
you enable Advanced User (in the
PRINTER CONTROL menu).
Ld Set from Flsh
1
Appears only if the CT emulation is
installed.
2
Will not appear if Ethernet is
installed.
3
Appears only if Ethernet is installed.
Save Set to Flsh
Del Set from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
Alarm
On*
Cont. Beep
Continued at the top of next page
114
Off
CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
PRINTER CONTROL
(cont. from page 114)
Power-up State
Online*
Offline
Ptx Setup SFCC
21h*
01-FF
Overwrite Files
Enable*
Disable
Cancel Key
Disable* (1)
Enable
Compatibility
Default*
Laser
Advanced User
Disable*
Enable
Auto Locking
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Ignore
View File List
Delete Files
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
P5000
T3000
T1006
Set Lock Key
Ptx Setup Parse
Disable
RAM Disk Size
100 KB*
0-3000 KB
Glob Mem Adjust
3072K Bytes*
see page 122
Max Cache Memory
900 KBytes*
50-900 KBytes*
Max Cached Char
01 KBytes*
01-20 KBytes
Standard Chars.
340*
0-512
Bold Chars.
448*
0-512
Extra Bold Char.
504*
0-512
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when
you enable Advanced User (in the
PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
Batch Counter
Disable*
Enable
When Coax/Twinax interface is
installed, the factory default is Enable.
115
Chapter
3
PRINTER CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus
LP+ Emulation
This item selects the line or dot matrix printer to be emulated by the printer.
•
•
•
•
•
P-Series (see page 145)
P-Series XQ (see page 148)
Serial Matrix (see page 150)
Proprinter XL (see page 152)
Epson FX (see page 154)
The factory default is P-Series.
CTHI Emulation
This item appears only when the CTHI option is installed.
CTHI Emulation selects the operation of the CTHI option as either a standard
or simple protocol converter.
The default is Standard.
•
Standard
With a standard coax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM
coax printer models:
•
3287 Models 1 and 2
•
4234 Model 1
With a standard twinax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM
twinax printer models:
•
4234 Model 2
•
5225 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4
The standard Coax/Twinax emulation selection will only be available if
Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu.
NOTE: For more information, consult the Coax/Twinax Programmer’s
Reference Manual.
•
Simp Prot Conv (Simple Protocol Converter)
The Simple Protocol Converter (SPC) option allows those who use addon coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a
Printronix thermal printer with the Coax/Twinax (CTHI) capability as done
using a non-CT printer with the third party converter interfaces. The SPC
gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC, or network
system supporting parallel or serial interfaces, and to three different IBM
host systems.
116
•
System 3x
•
AS/400*
•
327x Control Units
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus
The SPC will support the same models for Twinax as the Printronix
P5000 printer.
The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax
3287. The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your
thermal printer: Centronics, serial, coax, and twinax. Also supported are
Epson, Proprinter XL, P-Series, Serial Matrix, VGL, and PGL emulations.
The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through
coax/twinax and parallel and serial interfaces. This is accomplished
through the Auto Switching feature (see “Auto Switching” on page 233).
Because of hardware restrictions, coax and twinax cannot be selected
together.
The factory default is Standard.
Active IGP Emul
This function allows the user to activate either the PGL or VGL emulation.
There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation. The first is by
selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu. The second is by
sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically (see
the appropriate Programmer’s Reference Manual for details).
When changing from one IGP emulation to the other, the printer will load the
saved configuration. Thus, any setting performed before selecting those
interfaces and not saved in NVRAM will be lost.
IMPORTANT
When the ACTIVE IGP EMUL is switched from one IGP emulation to
another, the printer will load the settings saved under the Power-Up
Config. menu. These settings may not be the current settings in use
prior to switching the Active IGP emulation. The Print Mode, Media
Sensor, Media Handling, Calibration, Label Length and Width and
numerous other settings in use will change to the settings saved under
the Power-Up Config. menu. Users should therefore insure that all
desired settings are saved as the printer Power-Up Config. menu
settings prior to switching the Active IGP emulation.
The options are IGP/PGL (the factory default) and IGP/VGL.
Host Interface
This option allows the user to send print jobs through any interface with autoswitching selected as host interface. It also allows a particular interface from
the menu to be selected.
The options are Auto Switching, Centronics, Serial, IEEE 1284, Twinax,
Coax, and Ethernet.
NOTE: The Twinax and Coax options appear only if the CT emulation is
installed. The Ethernet option appears only if Ethernet is installed.
The Centronics and IEEE 1284 options do not appear if Ethernet is
installed.
The factory default is Auto Switching.
117
Chapter
3
PRINTER CONTROL
Power Saver Time
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When instant is chosen, the
printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as printing stops.
Pressing any key removes the power saver message from the control panel.
Sending a print job to the printer also turns off power saver mode.
The options are 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, and 60, and 240 minutes.
The factory default is 15 minutes.
Pwr Save Control
Pwr Save Control allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode. If
enabled, the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect.
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, or Portuguese.
The factory default is English.
Del Char frm Fls
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from flash memory.
Ld Char from Fls
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory.
Save Char to Fls
This option saves downloaded character(s) to flash memory.
Del Char frm RAM
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from RAM.
Ld Char at PwrUp
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory at Power Up.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Del Set frm Flsh
This option deletes downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
Ld Set from Flsh
This option loads downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
118
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus
Save Set to Flsh
This option saves downloaded overlay set(s) to flash memory.
Del Set from RAM
This option deletes the downloaded overlay set(s) from RAM.
Ld Set at PwrUp
This option loads the downloaded overlay set from flash memory at Power
Up.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Alarm
•
On. An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault occurs, such as a
paper jam.
•
Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
•
Off. No audible alarm will sound.
The factory default is On.
Power-up State
•
•
Online. The printer powers up in the online state.
Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state. This selection must be
saved as a power-up configuration to be used.
The factory default is Online.
Ptx Setup SFCC
Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as
the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command. Valid hex values are 01-FF.
The factory default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the “!” character.
Overwrite Files
This allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the
overwrite function.
The options are Enable (the factory default) and Disable.
View File List
Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the ↓ key displays the file
size.
119
Chapter
3
PRINTER CONTROL
Delete Files
Allows you to delete files in the file list. Contact your administrator for
assistance.
Optimize&Reboot
Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After pressing ↵ wait for the
printer to reboot.
Print File List
Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on
File System usage.
Cancel Key
•
•
Disable.
Enable. When enabled, the key may be used in offline mode to clear
all data in the print buffer and deleted data will not be printed.
The factory default is Disable. (When the Coax/Twinax interface is installed,
the factory default is Enable.)
Compatibility
This parameter allows you to make T5000 Series thermal printers compatible
with other printers.
When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes, you may not
always be able to make them equal in size. This is due to the various Dot-PerInch differences between printer types. In the case where an exact match
cannot be made, the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will
not be compromised and the barcode will be readable.
•
•
•
Default. Use for optimum performance.
•
T3000. Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal
printers.
•
T1006. Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal
printers.
Laser. Forces the output to correspond with the laser line of printers.
P5000. Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix
printers.
The factory default is Default.
Advanced User
•
•
Disable.
Enable. When enabled, this function permits access to submenu items
which would not normally be changed by a typical user.
The factory default is Disable.
120
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus
Auto Locking
•
•
Disable. The ↵ (ENTER) key must be locked manually.
Enable. The printer automatically locks the ↵ key five minutes after the
last control panel key press.
The factory default is Disable.
Set Lock Key
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the ↓ and ↵ keys are pressed at
the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to
lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any group of keys as
the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ↵ key or any key
combinations which are already used for another function. There is no limit to
how many keys can be selected.
To set the new lock key:
1. Go to the PRINTER CONTROL main menu and select “Set Lock Key”.
2. Press ↵. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3. Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key. Make
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read. “Enter the new lock key
again.” Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the
selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to
step 2 and start over.
5. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will
read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the
display will read “Validation failed.” Start over at step 1.
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the PAUSE
key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered
off and back on.
Ptx Setup Parse
Enables, ignores, or disables the PTX SETUP command.
The factory default is Enable.
RAM Disk Size
Use this option to increase or decrease the amount of space available to store
files on the RAM disk.
The range is 0-3000 KB, and the factory default is 100 KB.
121
Chapter
3
PRINTER CONTROL
Glob Mem Adjust
This menu allows you to adjust the ratio of global memory allocated to label
size vs. PGL forms, fonts, and logos. For example, when using short labels,
you can allocate more memory to forms, fonts, and logos by increasing the
Glob Mem Adjust value. The default settings and adjustment ranges depend
upon the amount of installed printer DRAM and are listed below.
NOTE: You can find the amount of installed DRAM in two ways: listed at the
top of your configuration printout under “DRAM” or viewed from the
control panel via the DIAGNOSTIC menu under System Memory.
DRAM Installed
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
Factory Default
0 MB
0 MB
3 MB
Range
0 MB
0 to 1 MB
0 to 9 MB
Max Cache Memory
The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block
that can be allocated to the font cache. The font cache stores bitmaps that are
created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash. The
cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed.
To calculate the memory requirement, use this equation:
horizontal
resolution x
vertical
resolution x
average
character
height
(inches) x
average
character
width
(inches) x
# of characters
to be cached
8
The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 900 KBytes in 50-KByte
increments.
The factory default is 900 KB.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Max Cached Char
The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest
character that can be stored in the font cache. To calculate the memory
requirement, use this equation:
horizontal resolution
x
vertical resolution
x
8
122
average
character height
(inches) x
character width
(inches)
PRINTER CONTROL Submenus
For example, with a print head that prints at 203 dpi you would use the
following formula:
203 X 203 X 1 X 1
= 5,151
8
Therefore, select a value that is equal to or greater than 5,151. The closest
available value is 6 KBytes.
The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes, in 1-KByte increments.
The factory default is 01 KBytes.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Standard Chars.
This menu entry permits the user to adjust the thickness or font weight of
standard text fonts.
The range is 0-512, and the factory default is 340.
Bold Chars.
This menu entry permits the user to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold
text fonts. This menu will not take effect unless it is saved in a configuration
and the printer is powered up with that configuration.
The range is 0-512, and the factory default is 448.
Extra Bold Char.
This menu entry permits the user to adjust the thickness or font weight of
extra bold text fonts.
The range is 0-512, and the factory default is 504.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Batch Counter
This is an Advanced User function for PGL only that allows the monitoring of
pages or forms left to be printed. The number of pages to be printed and the
number of pages printed already are displayed on the front control panel.
Batch Counter is activated by selecting Enable.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
123
Chapter
3
EMULATIONS
EMULATIONS
Overview
This section covers the following emulations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coax (page 128)
Twinax (page 131)
SPC Coax (page 134)
SPC Twinax (page 135)
IPDS (page 136)
TN5250 (page 138)
IGP/PGL (page 140)
IGP/VGL (page 142)
P-Series (page 145)
P-Series XQ (page 148)
Serial Matrix (page 150)
Proprinter XL (page 152)
Epson FX (page 154)
You can select emulation default parameters directly from the control panel, or
by control codes as explained in the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure an emulation, print a configuration sheet to
see all current settings.
Standard C/T Interface
With a standard coax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM coax
printer models:
•
•
3287 Models 1 and 2
4234 Models 1
With a standard twinax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM
twinax printer models:
•
•
4234 Model 2
5225 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4
NOTE: The standard Coax/Twinax emulation selection will only be available
if Coax or Twinax is selected from the C/T PORT main menu.
For more information, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference
Manual.
124
Overview
Simple Protocol Converter
The Simple Protocol Converter (SPC) option allows those who use third party
add-on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a
Printronix thermal printer with the Coax/Twinax (CTHI) capability as done
using a non-CT printer with the third party converter interfaces.
The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC, or
network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces, and to three different
IBM host systems:
•
•
•
System 3x
AS/400
327X Control Units
The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax: MODE 219,
MODE IBM, and MODE P5000.
The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax
3287. The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal
printer: Centronics, Serial, Coax, and Twinax. Also supported are Epson,
Proprinter XL, P-Series, Serial Matrix, VGL, and PGL emulations.
The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through
coax/twinax and parallel and serial interfaces. This is accomplished through
the Auto Switching feature. Because of hardware restrictions, coax and
twinax cannot be selected together.
PGL
The PGL emulation is the software based Printronix Graphics Language
(PGL) for the Printronix thermal printer family. It is based upon, and
compatible with, the IGP-100/200/400 board. It includes the following
features:
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with a “preprinted” look for each application. PGL programs control all graphic
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing
time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with userselectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered
when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific
location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged with the
form.
Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar
codes are available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A
through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13,
POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and PDF417. UPC and EAN bar codes can
specify add-on data.
125
Chapter
3
EMULATIONS
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 12, 13, 15, and 17
characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white
characters on a dark background.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields, which includes
automatic increment or decrement functions.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets, each
96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own
character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also
containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.
VGL
The VGL Graphics language is a software emulation designed for the thermal
printer. The VGL emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming
language produces on-line forms, bar codes and alphanumeric text
generation. It includes the following features.
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all
graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and
processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal,
solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special
alphanumeric print features.
Variable Bar Codes allow the bar code for your application to print with
standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available
bar codes are: Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and
C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, MSI, UPC-A,
UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is
available only in the horizontal direction. A dark print mode is included for
darker, high-contrast bar codes. The IBARC bar code command prints bar
codes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated 180 or rotated 270
degrees.
126
Overview
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous
range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed
print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 cpi (characters per
inch), permitting up to 170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of
print and shading features, providing a “customized” appearance for forms,
reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV, GS-Mark, UL,
and CSA symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and you can
also define custom symbols.
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing
white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded
background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing
may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and bar code data fields can be identified and
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a
specified reference point.
Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.
Based on the Multinational Character Set, you may create your own character
sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.
127
Chapter
3
COAX SETUP
COAX SETUP
COAX SETUP(1)(2)(3)
Primary Sets
See page 130
Translation Tbl
(page 194)
PA1
(page 185)
PA2
(page 185)
Buffer Reprint
(page 161)
Buffer Print
(page 161)
Disable*
Enable
Coax Type
(page 167)
4234*
3287
Active Char Set
(page 157)
Secondary Set*
Primary Set
Secondary Sets
See page 130
Early Print Cmpl
(page 170)
Disable*
Enable
SCS Buffer Cntrl
(page 189)
Don’t Wait*
Wait Until Done
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 158)
Printable*
Control Code
Intervention Req
(page 181)
Send To Host*
Do Not Send
CR At MPP + 1
(page 168)
On*
Off
Notes:
* = Factory Default
NL At MPP + 1
(page 183)
On*
Off
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
Position Aft FF
(page 185)
Off*
On
menu appears only if Port Type (under C/T PORT)
is set to Coax.
3
Continued at the top of next page
128
This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2 This
This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation (under
PRINTER CONTROL) is set to Standard.
COAX SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Last Char = FF
(page 182)
On*
Off
Null Suppression
(page 184)
Off*
On
FF Validity
(page 174)
Off*
On
Auto Skip At End
(page 159)
Off*
On
FF After Job
(page 174)
Off*
On
CR, EM, & NL
(page 168)
On*
Off
Translate Table
(page 194)
Default*
Downloaded
Host Override
(page 179)
Disable*
Enable
Format Control
(page 175)
Disable*
Enable
Cancel IGP/DCU
(page 161)
Enable*
Disable
Lead-in Chars
(page 182)
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ¬¬$
Change Case
(page 161)
Dual Case*
Mono Case
Set Text Orientn
(page 191)
Control By Host*
Left to Right
Max. Print Width
(page 183)
13.2 inches*
Printer Width
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Right to Left
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
129
Chapter
3
COAX SETUP
Coax Setup - Primary Sets and Secondary Sets
COAX SETUP
Primary Sets
(from page 128)
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0285 English UK
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0287 Danish Alt
0278 Finnish
0288 Finn. Alt
0297 French
0500 Internat 5
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0289 Span. Alt
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0803 Hebrew Old
0424 Hebrew
0892 OCR A
0893 OCR B
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0905 Turk. Old
0256 Intern. 1
0924 Euro Lat-9
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
Secondary Sets
(from page 128)
English US*
English UK
Austrian/German
German (Alt)
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Danish (Alt)
Finnish/Swedish
Finnish (Alt)
French
International
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
130
Portuguese
Portug. (Alt)
Spanish
Spanish (Alt)
Spanish Speak.
Swiss Fren/Ger
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Turkish Old
Latin2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Although these options are listed vertically
here, use your plus (+) and minus (-) keys
to cycle through the options when you are
operating your printer.
TWINAX SETUP
TWINAX SETUP(1)(2)(3)
Primary Sets
(page 133)
Translation Tbl(4)
(page 195)
Buffer Print
(page 161)
Disable*
Enable
Twinax Type
(page 195)
IPDS 256 Bytes*
IPDS 1024 Bytes
Active Char Set
(page 157)
Secondary Set*
Primary Set
Standard Char*
Extended Char
5225
4234
Secondary Sets
See page 133
5225 World Trade
(page 156)
Cancel IGP/DCU
(page 161)
Enable*
Lead-in Chars
(page 182)
Set 1 <%>*
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 158)
Printable*
Disable
Set 2 ¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Control Code
Graphic Chek Err
(page 176)
Enable*
Disable
Graphic Chek Cod
(page 176)
60*
40 - FE
Notes:
* = Factory Default
LAC Option
(page 181)
LAC Approx.
(page 181)
Enable*
On*
Disable
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2
This menu appears only if Port Type (under C/T PORT)
is set to Twinax.
3
This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation (under
PRINTER CONTROL) is set to Standard.
4
This menu does not appear if the IPDS emulation is
installed.
Off
131
Chapter
3
TWINAX SETUP
TWINAX SETUP(1)(2)(3)
(cont. from prev. page)
Set Text Orientn
(page 191)
Control By Host*
Left to Right
Host Override
(page 179)
Disable*
Enable
Format Control
(page 175)
Disable*
Enable
Max. Print Width
(page 183)
13.2 inches*
Right to Left
Printer Width
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
132
1
This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2
This menu appears only if Port Type (under C/T PORT)
is set to Twinax.
3
This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation (under
PRINTER CONTROL) is set to Standard.
Twinax Setup - Primary Sets and Secondary Sets
TWINAX SETUP
Primary Sets
(from page 131)
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0278 Finnish
0297 French
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0285 English UK
0892 OCR A
0893 OCR B
0424 Hebrew
0803 Hebrew Old
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0256 Intern. 1
1112 Balt Mult
0924 Euro Lat-9
1122 Estonian
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro English UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
0500 Internat 5
Secondary Sets
(from page 131)
English US*
Austrian/German
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Finnish/Swedish
French
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English UK
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Latin2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
Multinational
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Although these options are listed vertically
here, use your plus (+) and minus (-) keys
to cycle through the options when you are
operating your printer.
133
Chapter
3
SPC COAX SETUP
SPC COAX SETUP
SPC COAX
SETUP(1)(2)(3)
SPC Type
(page 193)
Logical Buf Size
(page 182)
Intervention Req
(page 181)
Buffer Print
(page 161)
PTX NI*
1920*
Send To Host*
Avatar Comp
960
2560
3440
3564
Do Not Send
Disable*
Enable
Null Handling
(page 183)
Space*
Ignore
SPC Null Supp
(page 192)
Disable*
Enable
SPC Space Supp
(page 192)
Disable*
Enable
Translation Tbl
(page 195)
PA1
(page 185)
PA2
(page 185)
Buffer Reprint
(page 161)
SFCC Char
(page 191)
NL At MPP + 1
(page 183)
Set 1 <%>*
On*
Set 2 ^^$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Off
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
134
1
This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2
This menu appears only if Port Type (under C/T PORT)
is set to Coax.
3
Appears only if CTHI emulation (under PRINTER
CONTROL) is set to Simp Prot Conv.
SPC TWINAX SETUP
SPC TWINAX
SETUP(1)(2)(3)
SPC Type
(page 193)
MODE PTX NI*
MODE 219
MODE P5000
MODE IBM
SFCC Char
(page 191)
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ^^$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
SPC Char Set
(page 192)
0500 Internat 5*
0037 English US
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0278 Finnish
0297 French
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0290 Japan Kata
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0285 English UK
Translation Tbl
(page 195)
Buffer Print
(page 161)
Disable*
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
1
This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
2
This menu appears only if Port Type (under C/T PORT)
is set to Twinax.
3
Appears only if CTHI emulation (under PRINTER
CONTROL) is set to Simp Prot Conv.
135
Chapter
3
IPDS SETUP
IPDS SETUP
IPDS SETUP(1)
Default Font
See page 137
Default Code Pag
See page 137
Code Page Subset
(page 167)
Version 0*
Version 1
Emulation
(page 171)
4028 IPDS*
3816 IPDS
Early Print Comp
(page 170)
Off*
On
Host Form Length
(page 178)
Disable*
Enable
Null Suppression
(page 184)
Disable*
Enable
Page Rotation
(page 185)
0*
90
VPA Check
(page 198)
Enable*
Disable
Expanded Fonts
(page 173)
Scalable*
Compatible
Hexdump mode
(page 176)
Disable*
Enable
180
270
Notes:
* = Factory Default
1
136
This menu appears only if the IPDS emulation is
installed.
IPDS Setup - Default Font and Default Code Pag
IPDS SETUP
Default Font(1)
(from page 136)
Courier 10*
Prestige 10
Courier it 10
OCRA
APL 12
Courier 12
Prestige 12
Courier it 12
Prestige it 12
Boldface PSM
Courier 15
Courier 17.1
Gothic 20
Times Roman 6
Times Roman 8
Times Roman 10
Times Roman 12
Times Roman B10
Times Roman B12
Times Roman B14
Times Roman B18
Times Roman B24
Times Roman I10
Times Roman I12
Times Roman BI10
Times Roman BI12
OCRB
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Although these options are listed vertically
here, use your plus (+) and minus (-) keys
to cycle through the options when you are
operating your printer.
1 Refer
to page 169 for a more detailed
description of this submenu.
2 Refer
to page 169 for a more detailed
description of this submenu.
Default Code Pag(2)
(from page 136)
English/USA/Can*
English/US/Intl
Internat. Set 1
Symbols Set 7
Canadian/French
Austrian/German
Belgian Old
Brazilian
Canada (French)
Danish/Norw.
Finnish/Swedish
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Portuguese
Spanish Speak.
English (UK)
Aust/Germ. (ALT)
Dan/Norw. (ALT)
Fin/Swed. (ALT)
Spanish (ALT)
Katakana
French Azerty
Graphic Escape
Int. Typographic
Arabic
Greek
Hebrew
PC
Internat. Set 5
Hebrew ALT
PC-Multilingual
Latin 2/ROECE
Icelandic
Cyrillic Old
OCR A
OCR B
DCF
US Text Subset
Turkish Latin 5
Euro US/Can.
Euro Aust/Germ.
Euro Dan/Norw.
Euro Fin/Swed.
Euro Italian
Euro Spanish
Euro UK Ireland
Euro French
Euro Internat.
Euro Icelandic
137
Chapter
3
TN5250 SETUP
TN5250 SETUP
5250 SETUP(1)
Primary Sets
(page 139)
Translation Tbl(2)
(page 195)
Buffer Print
(page 161)
Active Char Set
(page 157)
Disable*
Secondary Set*
Enable
Primary Set
Secondary Sets
(page 139)
Lead-in Chars
(page 182)
Set 1 <%>*
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 158)
Printable*
Set 2 ¬¬$
Enable*
Disable
Graphic Chek Cod
(page 176)
60*
40 - FE
Control By Host*
Left to Right
Host Override
(page 179)
Disable*
Enable
Format Control
(page 175)
Disable*
Enable
Max. Print Width
(page 183)
13.2 inches*
User Defined
Control Code
Graphic Chek Err
(page 176)
Set Text Orientn
(page 191)
Set 3 _%_
Printer Width
Right to Left
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User
(in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
138
1
This menu appears only if the
TN5250 option is installed.
2
This menu does not appear if the
IPDS emulation is installed.
TN5250 Setup - Primary Sets and Secondary Sets
5250 SETUP
Primary Sets
(from page 138)
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0278 Finnish
0297 French
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0285 English UK
0892 OCR A
0893 OCR B
0424 Hebrew
0803 Hebrew Old
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0256 Intern. 1
1112 Balt Mult
0924 Euro Lat-9
1122 Estonian
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro English UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
0500 Internat 5
Secondary Sets
(from page 138)
English US*
Austrian/German
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Finnish/Swedish
French
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English UK
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Latin2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
Multinational
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Although these options are listed vertically
here, use your plus (+) and minus (-) keys
to cycle through the options when you are
operating your printer.
139
Chapter
3
IGP/PGL SETUP
IGP/PGL SETUP
IGP/PGL SETUP
Character Group
(page 164)
Standard Sets
(page 164)
Select LPI
(page 189)
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
6*
4) Norwegian
10) Italian
16-23 Dwn Overlay
5) Finnish
11) Turkish
24-31 User. Def
1-1000
Define CR Code
(page 169)
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Define LF Code
(page 169)
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Autowrap
(page 159)
Disable*
Enable
Auto Uppercase
(page 159)
Disable*
Enable
Slash 0
(page 192)
Disable*
Enable
Select SFCC
(page 190)
126*
1-255
Host Form Length
(page 178)
Enable*
Var. Length
Var Form Adjust
(page 197)
00.0 inches*
Var Form Type
(page 197)
Add Nothing*
Optimized Ratio
(page 184)
Disable*
Enable
PI Slew Range
(page 185)
16*
15
CR Edit
(page 168)
Disable*
Enable
Skip Cmd Prefix
(page 191)
Enable*
Disable
00.0 to 03.0 inches
Add ;0
Add ;X
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Continued at the top of next page
140
14-15 Reserved
European Sets
Disable
Italicized items are available only when you
enable Advanced User (in the PRINTER
CONTROL menu).
IGP/PGL SETUP
(cont. from page 140)
Ignore Text
(page 181)
Disable*
Enable
Power on IGP/PGL
(page 186)
Enable*
Disable
Ext Execute Copy
(page 173)
Disable*
Enable
AI 00 Spaces
(page 157)
Disable*
Enable
Select SO Char
(page 190)
14*
0-255
Ignore Mode
(page 180)
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
(page 189)
0*
0-255
Do FF at TOF
(page 170)
Enable*
Disable
IGP100 Compatbl.
(page 181)
Disable*
Enable
Expanded Font
(page 172)
Scalable*
Block
Scalable Size
(page 189)
Normal*
Block
Autoeject
(page 159)
Disable*
Enable
PGL Normal
(page 185)
LP+ Menu*
PGL Menu
Alt Block 1
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
UPC Descenders
(page 196)
Always*
Never
Only With PDF
I-2/5 Selection
(page 179)
Leading Zero*
Trailing Space
X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD
Fault
Off
User-Def Ratio
(page 197)
Error Report
(page 172)
Repeat Form Opt
(page 188)
Enable*
On*
Enable*
Disable
Debug Mode
Disable
141
Chapter
3
IGP/VGL SETUP
IGP/VGL SETUP
IGP/VGL SETUP
SFCC
(page 191)
94*
17-255
Power-up ^X
(page 186)
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^F
(page 186)
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^PY
(page 186)
Disable*
Enable
LPI
(page 183)
6*
6-10
Btm Margin Ctl
(page 160)
LP+ Menu*
Text Length
(page 193)
66*
1-255
Autoeject
(page 159)
Disable*
Enable
Copy Count
(page 168)
1*
1-999
Host Form Length
(page 178)
Enable*
Disable
Slash 0
(page 192)
Disable*
Enable
Ignore Dots
(page 180)
Disable*
Enable
Append Rotated
(page 158)
Disable*
Enable
Truncate Alpha
(page 195)
Enable*
Disable
True Vert 1/10
(page 195)
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After ^PY
(page 157)
UPC Descenders
(page 196)
Absorb Motion*
Enable*
Continued at the top of next page
142
VGL Text Length
Absorb All
Disable
Disable
* = Factory Default
IGP/VGL SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Select SO Char
(page 190)
14*
Rot. Char Size
(page 189)
Adjusted*
0-255
Not Adjusted
Ignore Spaces
(page 180)
Disable*
Enable
Midline PY
(page 183)
Disable*
Enable
Width Limit
(page 198)
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After ^PN
(page 156)
Disable*
Enable
Expanded Font
(page 173)
Scalable*
Block
Auto FF at ^PN
(page 158)
Disable*
Enable
Error Msgs
(page 171)
Enable*
Disable
Error Markers
(page 171)
Enable*
Disable
Offpage Errors
(page 184)
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Errors
(page 160)
Enable*
Disable
Ignore Chars
(page 180)
Disable*
Char 1
Ignore Ch#1
(page 179)
0*
0-255
Ignore Ch#2
(page 180)
0*
0-255
Data Bit 8
(page 168)
Enable*
Disable
Cmd Resolution
(page 167)
Low Resolution*
Continued at the top of next page
Char 2
Char 1&2
High Resolution
* = Factory Default
143
Chapter
3
IGP/VGL SETUP
IGP/VGL SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
^Dnn Dot Slew
(page 156)
Low Resolution*
High Resolution
Barcode var.
(page 160)
Low Resolution*
High Resolution
Character Group
(page 166)
Standard Sets
(page 166)
144
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
Uniform Fonts
(page 196)
Disable*
Enable
Prop Line Length
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Printer PI
(page 187)
Disable*
Enable
Host PI
(page 179)
Disable*
Enable
Max PI 16
(page 183)
Enable*
Disable
European Sets
4) Norwegian
10) Italian
5) Finnish
11) Turkish
* = Factory Default
P-SERIES SETUP
P-SERIES SETUP
Select CPI
(page 189)
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
Select LPI
(page 189)
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
15.0 CPI
Typeface
(page 196)
Letter Gothic*
Character Group
(page 163)
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
IBM PC*
Multinational
ECMA Latin 1
Character Set*
(page 163)
Primary Subset*
(page 163)
Courier
ASCII (USA)*
Italian
French
Spanish
Norwegian
Extended Subset*
(page 163)
German
Japanese
Danish II
Code Page 437*
120* DPI
60-400 DPI
Vertical DPI
(page 197)
72* DPI
72-400 DPI
Prop. Spacing
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Slashed Zero
(page 192)
Disable*
Disable*
OCR-B
English
European Sets
DEC Mult.
Danish
French Canadian
Spanish II
20.0 CPI
CP 858 EURO
Swedish
Latin American
Latin Am II
Code Page 850
Horizontal DPI
(page 177)
Italic Print
(page 181)
OCR-A
17.1 CPI
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Enable
Left Margin(1)
(page 182)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Right Margin(1)
(page 188)
0* characters
0-369 characters
* = Factory Default
1 These menus do not display when
Continued at the top of next page
the CT emulation is selected.
145
Chapter
3
P-SERIES SETUP
P-SERIES SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Top Margin
(page 194)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Bottom Margin
(page 160)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Print Char. Set
(page 187)
Define CR code
(page 169)
Auto LF
(page 158)
Define LF code
(page 170)
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Control Code 06
(page 167)
8.0 LPI*
Control Code 08
(page 167)
Elongated*
Bold
(page 160)
Disable*
Enable
Overstrike
(page 184)
Enable*
Disable
Select SFCC
(page 190)
1*
0-7F
EVFU Select
(page 172)
Enable*
Disable
10.3 LPI
Backspace
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 157)
Control Code*
Printable
SFCC d command
(page 191)
Even dot plot*
Double high
PSeries Dbl High
(page 188)
FF valid at TOF
(page 174)
Normal*
Enable*
6.0 LPI
P3/4/6/9 Compat
Disable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Continued at the top of next page
146
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
P-SERIES SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Text Position
(page 194)
Host Command
(page 178)
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(page 188)
Bottom of Line*
Enable*
Top of Line
Ignore All
Disable*
Ignore CPI
Power up config
Ignore LPI
Current config
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 174)
4 or 6 inches* (3)
00.0 to 24.0 inches
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 175)
101.6 or 152.4 mm* (3)
00.0 to 609.6 mm
Form Length(1)
(page 175)
24 or 36 lines* (3)
0 to 144 lines
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
04.1, 06.6, or 08.5 inches* (3)
00.0 to 13.6 inches
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
104.1, 168.0, or 215.9 mm* (3)
00.0 to 345.4 mm
Form Width(4)
(page 175)
41, 66, or 85 characters* (3)
Factory config
0 to 272 characters
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable
Advanced User (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction.
When you change the default in one submenu, the
other default values in the other two submenus
change automatically.
2
These menus do not display when the CT emulation
is selected.
3
The factory default value depends on the width of the
printer model.
4
All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction.
When you change the default in one submenu, the
other default values in the other two submenus
change automatically.
147
Chapter
3
P-SER XQ SETUP
P-SER XQ SETUP
P-SER XQ SETUP
Select CPI
(page 189)
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
Select LPI
(page 189)
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
Typeface
(page 196)
Letter Gothic*
Courier
Horizontal DPI
(page 177)
120 DPI*
60-400 DPI
Vertical DPI
(page 197)
72 DPI*
72-400 DPI
Prop. Spacing
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Italic Print
(page 181)
Slashed Zero
(page 192)
Disable*
Disable*
Forward Slant
15.0 CPI
OCR-A
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
OCR-B
Backward Slant
Enable
Left Margin(1)
(page 182)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Right Margin(1)
(page 188)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Top Margin
(page 194)
0 linespaces*
0-451 linespaces
Bottom Margin
(page 160)
0 linespaces*
0-451 linespaces
Print Char. Set
(page 187)
Define CR code
(page 169)
Auto LF
(page 158)
Define LF code
(page 170)
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
* = Factory Default
1
Continued at the top of next page
148
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
P-SER XQ SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Control Code 06
(page 167)
Compressed Print
(page 167)
Bold
(page 160)
Notes:
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
Char 01 SOH*
Disable*
6.0 LPI
Char 03 ETX
* = Factory Default
Char 09 HT
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User
(in the PRINTER CONTROL
menu).
1
All three Form Length
submenus work in conjunction.
When you change the default
in one submenu, the other
default values in the other two
submenus change
automatically.
2
These menus do not display
when the CT emulation is
selected.
Enable
Elong/Alt. Font
(page 171)
Elng=BS Font=SO*
Gothic Typeface
(page 176)
Char 02 STX*
Elng=SO Font=BS
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
EVFU Select
(page 172)
Enable*
Disable
3
Upr. Case Select
(page 197)
The factory default value
depends on the width of the
printer model.
Disable*
Enable
4
All three Form Width submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default
values in the other two
submenus change
automatically.
Slew Relative
(page 192)
1 to 15 lines*
Text Position
(page 194)
Bottom of Line*
Host Command
(page 178)
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(page 188)
Enable*
1 to 16 lines
Top of Line
Ignore All
Disable*
Ignore CPI
Power up config
Ignore LPI
Current config
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 174)
4 or 6 inches* (3)
00.0 to 24.0 inches
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 175)
101.6 or 152.4 mm* (3)
00.0 to 609.6 mm
Form Length(1)
(page 175)
24 or 36 lines* (3)
0 to 144 lines
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
04.1, 06.6, or 08.5 inches* (3)
00.0 to 13.6 inches
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
104.1, 168.0, or 215.9 mm* (3)
00.0 to 345.4 mm
Form Width(4)
(page 175)
41, 66, or 85 characters* (3)
Factory config
0 to 272 characters
149
Chapter
3
SER MATRIX SETUP
SER MATRIX SETUP
SER MATRIX SETUP
Select CPI
(page 189)
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
Select LPI
(page 189)
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
15.0 CPI
Typeface
(page 196)
Letter Gothic*
Character Group
(page 163)
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
IBM PC*
Multinational
ECMA Latin 1
Character Set*
(page 163)
Primary Subset*
(page 163)
Courier
ASCII (USA)*
Italian
French
Spanish
Norwegian
Extended Subset*
(page 163)
Japanese
120* DPI
60-400 DPI
Vertical DPI
(page 197)
72* DPI
72-400 DPI
Prop. Spacing
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Slashed Zero
(page 192)
Disable*
Disable*
European Sets
DEC Mult.
Danish
French Canadian
Forward Slant
CP 858 EURO
Swedish
Latin American
Latin Am II
Backward Slant
Enable
Left Margin(1)
(page 182)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Right Margin(1)
(page 188)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Top Margin
(page 194)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Bottom Margin
(page 160)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Print Char. Set
(page 187)
OCR-B
English
Spanish II
20.0 CPI
Code Page 850
Horizontal DPI
(page 177)
Italic Print
(page 181)
150
Code Page 437*
OCR-A
German
Danish II
17.1 CPI
Continued at the top of next page
* = Factory Default
1
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
SER MATRIX SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Define CR code
(page 169)
Auto LF
(page 158)
Define LF code
(page 169)
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Enable*
Disable
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
* = Factory Default
Control Code 06
(page 167)
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
Bold
(page 160)
Disable*
Enable
Overstrike
(page 184)
Enable*
Disable
Printer Select
(page 187)
Disable*
Enable
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 157)
ESC d command
(page 172)
Text Position
(page 194)
Host Command
(page 178)
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(page 188)
Notes:
Control Code*
Even dot plot*
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
All three Form Length submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
2
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
3
The factory default value depends
on the width of the printer model.
4
All three Form Width submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
Printable
Double high
Bottom of Line*
Enable*
6.0 LPI
Top of Line
Ignore All
Disable*
Ignore CPI
Power up config
Ignore LPI
Current config
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 174)
4 or 6 inches* (3)
00.0 to 24.0 inches
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 175)
101.6 or 152.4 mm* (3)
00.0 to 609.6 mm
Form Length(1)
(page 175)
24 or 36 lines* (3)
0 to 144 lines
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
04.1, 06.6, or 08.5 inches* (3)
00.0 to 13.6 inches
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
104.1, 168.0, or 215.9 mm* (3)
00.0 to 345.4 mm
Form Width(4)
(page 175)
41, 66, or 85 characters* (3)
Factory config
0 to 272 characters
151
Chapter
3
PROPRINTER SETUP
PROPRINTER SETUP
PROPRINTER SETUP
Select CPI
(page 189)
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
Select LPI
(page 189)
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
15.0 CPI
Typeface
(page 196)
Letter Gothic*
Character Group
(page 165)
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Character Set*
(page 165)
Courier
OCR-A
OCR-B
Multinational
CP 858 EURO
60-400 DPI
Vertical DPI
(page 197)
72* DPI
72-400 DPI
Prop. Spacing
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Slashed Zero
(page 192)
European Sets
Code Page 850
120* DPI
Disable*
Disable*
Forward Slant
20.0 CPI
OCR-B
Code Page 437*
Horizontal DPI
(page 177)
Italic Print
(page 181)
OCR-A
17.1 CPI
Backward Slant
Enable
Left Margin(1)
(page 182)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Right Margin(1)
(page 188)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Top Margin
(page 194)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Bottom Margin
(page 160)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Print Char. Set
(page 187)
* = Factory Default
1
Continued at the top of next page
152
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
PROPRINTER SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Define CR code
(page 169)
Auto LF
(page 158)
Define LF code
(page 169)
20 CPI Condensed
(page 156)
Notes:
CR = CR*
Enable*
LF = LF*
Enable*
CR = CR + LF
FF valid at TOF
(page 174)
Enable*
Disable
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(page 188)
Set 1*
Set 2
Bottom of Line*
Enable*
All three Form Length submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
2
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
3
The factory default value depends
on the width of the printer model.
4
All three Form Width submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
Disable
Enable
Host Command
(page 178)
1
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Text Position
(page 194)
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
Disable
Bold
(page 160)
Alt. Char Set
(page 157)
* = Factory Default
Top of Line
Ignore All
Disable*
Ignore CPI
Power up config
Ignore LPI
Current config
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 174)
4 or 6 inches* (3)
00.0 to 24.0 inches
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 175)
101.6 or 152.4 mm* (3)
00.0 to 609.6 mm
Form Length(1)
(page 175)
24 or 36 lines* (3)
0 to 144 lines
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
04.1, 06.6, or 08.5 inches* (3)
00.0 to 13.6 inches
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
104.1, 168.0, or 215.9 mm* (3)
00.0 to 345.4 mm
Form Width(4)
(page 175)
41, 66, or 85 characters* (3)
Factory config
0 to 272 characters
153
Chapter
3
EPSON FX SETUP
EPSON FX SETUP
EPSON FX SETUP
Select CPI
(page 189)
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
Select LPI
(page 189)
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
Typeface
(page 196)
Letter Gothic*
Character Group
(page 162)
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Epson Set*
OCR-A
OCR-B
Code Page 850
CP 858 EURO
IBM PC
Character Set*
(page 162)
Epson Set*
(page 162)
Courier
ASCII (USA)*
Italian
French
Spanish I
French Canadian
Japanese
60-400 DPI
Vertical DPI
(page 197)
72* DPI
72-400 DPI
Prop. Spacing
(page 187)
Enable*
Disable
Slashed Zero
(page 192)
Disable*
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
OCR-B
European Sets
Multinational
English
Danish I
Norwegian
Danish II
Swedish
Latin Am II
Latin Am I
120* DPI
Disable*
OCR-A
German
Horizontal DPI
(page 177)
Italic Print
(page 181)
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Enable
Left Margin(1)
(page 182)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Right Margin(1)
(page 188)
0* characters
0-369 characters
Top Margin
(page 194)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
* = Factory Default
Continued at the top of next page
154
15.0 CPI
1
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
EPSON FX SETUP
(cont. from prev. page)
Bottom Margin
(page 160)
0* linespaces
0-451 linespaces
Print Char. Set
(page 187)
Notes:
Define CR code
(page 169)
Auto LF
(page 158)
Define LF code
(page 169)
CR = CR*
Enable*
LF = LF*
20 CPI Condensed
(page 156)
Enable*
Disable
Bold
(page 160)
Disable*
Enable
Text Position
(page 194)
Host Command
(page 178)
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(page 188)
Enable
Printable
Bottom of Line*
Enable*
1
All three Form Length submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
2
These menus do not display when
the CT emulation is selected.
3
The factory default value depends
on the width of the printer model.
4
All three Form Width submenus
work in conjunction. When you
change the default in one
submenu, the other default values
in the other two submenus change
automatically.
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Control Code*
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
Disable
Printer Select
(page 187)
Alt. Set 80-9F
(page 157)
* = Factory Default
CR = CR + LF
Top of Line
Ignore All
Disable*
Ignore CPI
Power up config
Ignore LPI
Current config
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 174)
4 or 6 inches* (3)
00.0 to 24.0 inches
Form Length(1)(2)
(page 175)
101.6 or 152.4 mm* (3)
00.0 to 609.6 mm
Form Length(1)
(page 175)
24 or 36 lines* (3)
0 to 144 lines
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
04.1, 06.6, or 08.5 inches* (3)
00.0 to 13.6 inches
Form Width(2)(4)
(page 175)
104.1, 168.0, or 215.9 mm* (3)
00.0 to 345.4 mm
Form Width(4)
(page 175)
41, 66, or 85 characters* (3)
Factory config
0 to 272 characters
155
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Emulation Submenus
NOTE: The following descriptions are grouped together for all emulations
and are listed in alphabetical order.
^Dnn Dot Slew
(From page 143.)
•
Low Resolution. Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted
as 60 dpi P-Series dots.
•
High Resolution. Sets the dot slew command dot values to be
interpreted as print engine dots.
The factory default is Low Resolution.
20 CPI Condensed
(From page 153, page 155.) Compressed print characters are narrower than
the normal character set. This is helpful for applications where you need to
print the maximum amount of information on a page.
•
Enable. Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when
compressed print is chosen by the host computer.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
The factory default is Enable.
5225 World Trade
(From page 131.) The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character
set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set
assortments.
The options are Standard Char (the factory default) and Extended Char.
Absorb After ^PN
(From page 143.)
•
Disable. The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the
^PN command are sent to the printer and processed.
•
Enable. The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the
^PN command are ignored.
The factory default is Disable.
156
Absorb After ^PY
(From page 142.)
•
Absorb Motion. The paper motion line terminator immediately following
the graphics ^PY command will be ignored.
•
Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host
generated terminator is detected.
•
Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to
the printer and result in paper motion.
The factory default is Absorb Motion.
Active Char Set
(From page 128, page 131, page 138.) Selects which group of character sets
(Primary or Secondary) will be active.
The factory default is Secondary Set.
AI 00 Spaces
(From page 141.) This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes
whose application identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable. The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in
parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
The factory default is Disable.
Alt. Char Set
(From page 153.)
•
Set 1. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control
code.
•
Set 2. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
The factory default is Set 1.
Alt. Set 80-9F (P-Series, Serial Matrix, Epson FX)
(From page 146, page 151, page 155.)
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
The factory default is Control Code.
157
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Alt. Set 80-9F (Coax, Twinax, TN5250)
(From page 128, page 131, page 138.)
•
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
The factory default is Printable.
Append Rotated
(From page 142.)
•
Disable. Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate
elements.
•
Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.
The factory default is Disable.
Auto FF at ^PN
(From page 143.) When enabled, a FF will be generated automatically to slew
to the end of form when the ^PN command is encountered, and when the
current vertical position is not at the top of form.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Auto LF (P-Series, P-Series XQ)
(From page 146, page 148.) This option defines the printer action when print
data is received past the forms width setting.
•
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
The factory default is Disable.
Auto LF (Serial Matrix, Proprinter XL, Epson FX)
(From page 151, page 153, page 155.) This option defines the printer action
when print data is received past the forms width setting.
•
Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
The factory default is Enable.
158
Auto Skip at End
(From page 129.) Specifies whether to perform an automatic form feed at the
end of a print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the
form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.
•
•
Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line.
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next
form.
The factory default is Off.
Auto Uppercase
(From page 140.) This parameter enables the printer to print text in all
uppercase when using the ALPHA command.
•
•
Disable. The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
The factory default is Disable.
Autoeject (PGL)
(From page 141.) If the last page of a job is not full, that is, the data does not
fill the entire page, you can instruct the printer to eject the page or to stop and
hold the page at the last print position.
•
Disable. The printer does not eject the last page unless you send a Page
Eject command or until the printer receives another print job.
•
Enable. The printer ejects the last page after the entire job has been
processed and printed.
The factory default is Disable.
Autoeject (VGL)
(From page 142.) Determines paper handling upon exiting the VGL Repeated
Form and Dynamic Form commands.
•
•
Disable. Holds the print position at the bottom of the form.
Enable. Issues a form feed after the last form is printed so all pages will
be physically printed.
The factory default is Disable.
Autowrap
(From page 140.) This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line
when the line of text exceeds the right margin.
•
Disable. Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF
is received.
•
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
The factory default is Disable.
159
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Barcode Errors
(From page 143.)
•
Enable. An error message will print when invalid bar code data is
encountered.
•
Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal bar code data; the bar code
will be skipped.
NOTE: When Barcode Errors is disabled, the VGL emulation will try to make
the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding
zeros to the end of bar code data to meet minimum data length
requirements for some bar codes. Not all errors will be corrected.
The factory default is Enable.
Barcode var.
(From page 144.) This command only applies for IBARC barcode command
format.
•
Low Resolution. Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as line
matrix printer (60 x72) dots.
•
High Resolution. Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as print
engine dots (300 x 300 or 203 x 203).
The factory default is Low Resolution.
Bold
(From page 146, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
•
•
Disable. Text is printed normally.
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
The factory default is Disable.
Bottom Margin
(From page 146, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 155.)
Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and
incrementing from the bottom up.
The range is 0-451 linespaces, and the factory default is 0 linespaces.
Btm Margin Ctl
(From page 142.) Determines the page’s bottom margin. If this option is set to
VGL Text Length, then Text Length changes the bottom margin value in the
LP+ Emulation sub-menu as follows: bottom = physical page length-top
margin-text length. If the option is set to LP+ Emulation Menu, then a change
in text length has no effect and the bottom margin setting in the LP+
Emulation menu will be used although the new text length value still shows in
the menu.
The options are LP+ Menu (the factory default) and VGL Text Length.
160
Buffer Print
(From page 128, page 131, page 134, page 135, page 138.)
•
•
Disable. The printer will print normally.
Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received
from the host as hex values.
NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host
computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print
from enable to disable.
The factory default is Disable.
Buffer Reprint
(From page 128, page 134.) This option is valid only when the printer is
printing in Coax SCS mode. When the ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint
Enabled” is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host.
Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and “Buffer
Reprint Disabled” is displayed.
Cancel IGP/DCU
(From page 129, page 131.)
•
Enable. Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or
when the CANCEL key is pressed.
•
Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is
put on hold from the host, or when the CANCEL key is pressed.
The factory default is Enable.
Change Case
(From page 129.) Specifies the font as Mono or Dual Case. This option is
available only in Coax non-SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change
when the printer is put online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the
character set is one of the following “right to left” sets: Katak, Hebrew, Old
Hebrew, and Farsi.
SCS (Systems Network Architecture Character String) Mode is controlled by
the host computer.
The options are Dual Case (the factory default) and Mono Case.
161
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Character Group and Character Sets (Epson FX)
(From page 154.) This menu item selects the character set used by the
printer. The available character sets are shown below.
Character Group
(Epson FX)
Standard
Sets*
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MSDOS CP710
MSDOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Epson Set*
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Latin Am II
French Canadian
Latin Am I
OCR-A
Cyrillic Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7-bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
OCR-B
Multinational
Code Page
850
Greek Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
CP 858
EURO
IBM PC
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
To access the desired basic character set, use the
+ and - keys. To select the set, press the ↵ key.
After you have selected the basic set, access the
subset selection menu by pressing the ↓ key.
Once in the subset menu, access the desired
subset by pressing the + and - keys and select it by
pressing the ↵ key. The Epson subset is accessed
and selected in the same manner.
162
Character Group and Character Sets (P-Series, Serial Matrix)
(From page 145, page 150.) This menu item selects the character set used by
the printer. The available character sets are shown below.
Character Group
(P-Series,
Serial Matrix)
Standard
Sets*
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP864
IBM CP1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
IBM PC*
Multinational
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
Cyrillic Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7 Bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
ECMA Latin 1
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
German
Swedish
English
Danish
Norw./Danish
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Italian
English
Spanish
Dutch
Japanese
French
French Canadian
Spanish
Dutch
Italian
Finnish
Turkish
Swiss
Japanese
Extended Subset
CP 858
Multinational*
EURO
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Notes:
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
* = Factory Default.
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
To access the desired basic character set,
Greek LQ 10 CPI
use the + and - keys. To select the set,
Grap. DP 10 CPI
press the ↵ key. After you have selected the
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
basic set, access the subset selection menu
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
by pressing the ↓ key. Once in the subset
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
menu, access the desired subset by
pressing the + and - keys and select it by
pressing the ↵ key. Primary and extended
character subsets are accessed and
selected in the same manner.
163
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Character Group and Character Sets (IGP/PGL)
(From page 140.) This menu item selects the character set used by the
printer. The available character sets are shown below.
Character Group
(IGP/PGL)
Standard
Sets*
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
Hebrew Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
164
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP 710
MS DOS CP 720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP864
IBM CP1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7 Bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Turkish Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
To access the desired basic character set, use the + and keys. To select the set, press the ↵ key. After you have
selected the basic set, access the subset selection menu by
pressing the ↓ key. Once in the subset menu, access the
desired subset by pressing the + and - keys and select it by
pressing the ↵ key.
Character Group and Character Sets (Proprinter XL)
(From page 152.) This menu item selects the character set used by the
printer. The available character sets are shown below.
Character Group
(Proprinter XL)
Standard
Sets*
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP 14
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP 864
IBM CP 1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Code Page
437*
Code Page
850
Cyrillic Sets
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7 Bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
OCR-A
European
Sets
Greek Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
OCR-B
Multinational
Hebrew Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
CP 858
EURO
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
To access the desired basic character set, use the + and - keys. To
select the set, press the ↵ key. After you have selected the basic
set, access the subset selection menu by pressing the ↓ key. Once
in the subset menu, access the desired subset by pressing the +
and - keys and select it by pressing the ↵ key. Character subsets
are accessed and selected in the same manner.
165
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Character Group and Character Sets (IGP/VGL)
(From page 144.) This menu item selects the character set used by the
printer. The available character sets are shown below.
Character Group
(IGP/VGL)
Standard
Sets*
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
Hebrew Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
166
Arabic Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP864
IBM CP1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
European
Sets
Cyrillic Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7-bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 Euro
Greek 869 Euro
Turkish Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
To access the desired basic character set, use
the + and - keys. To select the set, press the ↵
key. After you have selected the basic set,
access the subset selection menu by pressing
the ↓ key. Once in the subset menu, access the
desired subset by pressing the + and - keys and
select it by pressing the ↵ key.
Character Set
(From page 145, page 150, page 152, page 154.) This menu item allows
selection of the character set to be used by the printer.
Cmd Resolution
(From page 143.)
•
•
Low Resolution. Sets a low command resolution mode.
High Resolution. Sets a high command resolution mode.
The factory default is Low Resolution.
Coax Type
(From page 128.) This parameter defines the printer emulation, as follows:
•
•
4234
3287
After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host.
The factory default is 4234.
Code Page Subset
(From page 136.) This menu item allows the user to select the desired version
of the following code pages - 037,273, 274, 275, 277, 278, 280, 281, 282,
284, 285, 297, 500 and 871.
The options are Version 0 (the factory default) and Version 1.
Compressed Print
(From page 149.) Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
•
•
•
Char 01 SOH
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
The factory default is Char 01 SOH.
Control Code 06
(From page 146, page 149, page 151.) Control Code 06 defines the function
of ASCII code 06 hex (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6.0,
8.0 or 10.3 LPI.
The options factory default is 8.0 LPI.
Control Code 08
(From page 146.) Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code 08 hex
(BS). You can define the code to output an Elongated character or a
Backspace. The factory default is Elongated.
167
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Copy Count
(From page 142.) Determines the number of identical copies of each physical
page that will be printed.
The range is 1-999, and the factory default is 1.
CR at MPP+1
(From page 128.) MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line
length. This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at
MPP+1.
•
•
On. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line.
Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.
The factory default is On.
CR Edit
(From page 140.) This parameter determines if a carriage return will be
followed by a line feed.
•
Disable. The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by
line feeds.
•
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
The factory default is Disable.
CR, EM, & NL
(From page 129.) CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), & NL (New
Line) specify that the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as
spaces or as control codes.
•
•
On. Treats the CR, EM and NL commands as control codes.
Off. Treats the CR, EM and NL commands as spaces.
The factory default is On.
Data Bit 8
(From page 143.)
•
Enable. The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are
used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be
accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and enable the Host PI
configuration option (under the PI Ignored option).
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
168
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data
bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot
access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access
characters in the hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
The factory default is Enable.
Default Code Pag
(From page 136.)
This menu item allows the user to select the desired default codepage to be
used when IPDS is not activating a Code Page Id. Refer to the IPDS
Programmer’s Reference Manual for a list of the code pages.
The factory default is English/USA/Can.
Default Font
(From page 136.)
This menu item allows the user to select the desired default resident font to be
used when IPDS is not activating a Font Global Id. Refer to the IPDS
Programmer’s Reference Manual for a list of the fonts.
The factory default is Courier 10.
Define CR code
(From page 140, page 148, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (0D hex) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (0A hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
The factory default is CR = CR.
Define LF code (PGL, Serial Matrix, Proprinter XL, Epson FX)
(From page 140, page 151, page 153, page 155.) This parameter forces the
printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream
whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations,
but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the
printer.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be at the current print character position on the next line.
169
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
•
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
The factory default is LF = LF.
Define LF code (P-Series, P-Series XQ)
(From page 146, page 148.)
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is position 1 of the next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position on the next line.
The factory default is LF = CR + LF.
Do FF at TOF
(From page 141.) Determines whether the printer, with media already set at
the TOF (Top-of-form) position, will advance media to the next TOF position
upon receipt of a FF command.
•
Enable. The printer will advance media from the present TOF position to
the next TOF position upon receipt of a FF command, causing a blank
form.
•
Disable. The printer will not advance media from the present TOF
position to the next TOF position upon receipt of a FF command.
The factory default is Enable.
Early Print Cmpl (Coax)
(From page 128.) Early Print Complete capability allows the printer to send
print (order) complete status to the host before the printer is actually done
printing all data. This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC/DSE
mode.
•
Disable. The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until
all printing is complete.
•
Enable. The printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is
able to accept more data.
NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, there
may be data loss experienced.
The factory default is Disable.
Early Print Comp (IPDS)
(From page 136.) This parameter chooses when to send a Print Complete to
the Controller.
•
170
Off. Print Complete is sent if page is printed completely.
•
On. Print Complete is sent immediately. The next page will be created.
This improves the print performance when starting the next page, but
degrades error recovery.
The factory default is Off.
Elong./Alt. Font
(From page 149.) Controls which host command sets elongated (double high)
fonts and extended character set.
•
•
ELNG=BS (hex 08)
FONT=SO (hex 0E)
ELNG=SO
FONT=BS
The factory default is Elng=BS Font=SO.
Emulation
(From page 136.) This menu item allows the user to select the desired IPDS
emulation, either 4028 IPDS or 3816 IPDS.
The factory default is 4028 IPDS.
Epson Set
(From page 154.) This menu item allows selection of the desired Epson
character subset used by the printer. The options are listed on page 154.
The factory default is ASCII (USA).
Error Markers
(From page 143.)
•
Enable. Prints the following error markers for those elements that print
beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an
error other than an off-page error.
•
Disable.
The factory default is Enable.
Error Msgs
(From page 143.)
•
Enable. Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when
command parameters are incorrect.
•
Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.
The factory default is Enable.
171
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Error Report
(From page 141.) This menu item sets the error reporting capability of the
printer for PGL forms. The selections are the following:
•
On. Full error boundary checking reported. Any element that falls off the
current page is reported as an error.
•
Debug Mode. Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is defined
in CREATE mode. Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along
with an error if one has occurred.
•
Fault. Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs. If you select this
option, the PGL error prints on the paper, the message “IGP/PGL Error”
displays on the front panel, and the printer goes offline. You must clear
the error before the printer can resume normal operation.
•
Off. There is no form boundary checking whatsoever. Graphic elements
such as alpha, line, barcodes, etc. will be clipped if they are beyond the
page boundaries.
The factory default is On.
ESC d command
(From page 151.) This menu option is for backward compatibility.
•
Even dot plot. This option interprets the ESC d command as even dot
plot.
•
Double high. This option interprets the ESC d command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.
The factory default is Even dot plot.
EVFU Select
(From page 146, page 149.) Controls how the printer handles vertical
formatting.
•
Enable. Selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit
(EVFU).
•
Disable. Disables all EVFU processing.
The factory default is Enable.
Expanded Font (PGL)
(From page 141.) Expanded font allows the user to print characters in
different sizes with specified parameters. It also allows the selection of which
font face to use.
•
•
•
Scalable. Uses Gothic font.
Block. Uses Block font.
Alt Block 1. Uses alternative Block font with a different character set.
The factory default is Scalable.
172
Expanded Font (VGL)
(From page 143.) Expanded font allows you to print characters in different
sizes with specified parameters. It also allows you to select block or non-block
font face.
•
Scalable. Uses Gothic font as default. Other font faces can be selected
by using the IFONT command.
•
Block. Uses Block font.
The factory default is Scalable.
Expanded Fonts (IPDS)
(From page 136.) This option specifies which algorithm is used for expanding
a character string in Write Graphics.
•
Compatible. A resizing and smoothing algorithm will be performed on the
bitmapped font.
•
Scalable. A substitution will be done to a scalable outline font. Using
Scalable will increase performance and quality, however, the substitution
will only be done for Latin 1 characters of resident bitmapped fonts, and
the type is limited to Courier and Gothic. A scalable font cannot be
selected directly, and an LF3 format cannot be downloaded.
The factory default is Scalable.
Ext Execute Copy
(From page 141.)
•
Disable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the optional
Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of
the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)
•
Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form where
the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this
case, the same form is printed for whatever the Form Count is.
Incremental data is not incremented since the printing page is the same.
The overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent
forms, and each form is printed on a separate page.
The factory default is Disable.
Extended Subset
(From page 145, page 150.) This menu item allows selection of the desired
extended character subset used by the printer.
The options are Code Page 437 (the factory default) and Code Page 850.
173
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
FF After Job
(From page 129.) Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local
copy (print screen function).
•
Off. Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print
buffer (unless a new line, form feed or carriage return command was the
last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next
line.
•
On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was
the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the
first line on the next form.
The factory default is Off.
FF valid at TOF
(From page 146, page 153.) The FF valid at TOF option determines whether
the printer will perform a Form Feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command, if the printer is at the Top of Form.
•
Enable. Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the Top of Form.
The factory default is Enable.
FF Validity
(From page 129.) Determines if the position of a form feed command affects
its execution.
•
Off. Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line
or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command at any other
position is recognized as a blank.
•
On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the
data stream.
The factory default is Off.
Form Length (in.)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label. You can set
forms length in inches.
The factory default is shown in Table 2 on page 98.
174
Form Length (lines)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label. You can set
forms length as a function of the current LPI (lines per inch).
The factory default is shown in Table 2 on page 98.
Form Length (mm)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label. You can set
forms length in millimeters.
The factory default is shown in Table 2 on page 98.
Form Width (char.)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
The forms width can be specified as a function of the current CPI (characters
per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width.
The factory default is the maximum printing width divided by the selected
number of characters per inch.
Form Width (in.)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
In this submenu, form width is specified in inches. The forms width set should
not exceed the actual paper width.
The factory default is the maximum printing width.
Form Width (mm.)
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
In this submenu, form width is specified in millimeters. The forms width set
should not exceed the actual paper width.
The factory default is the maximum printing width.
Format Control
(From page 129, page 131, page 138.) Enables the printer to reflect the same
spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands
are executed.
•
Disable. Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL feature,
and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after
horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
175
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
•
Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL
feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position
(after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
The factory default is Disable.
Gothic Typeface
(From page 149.) Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
•
•
•
Char 02 STX
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
The factory default is Char 02 STX.
Graphic Chek Cod
(From page 131, page 138.) Specifies the replacement character to print in
place of any unprintable character that is received from the host. Choose a
hex character from 40 through FE. The character becomes the printer default
when:
•
•
•
The printer is powered off and then powered on.
An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.
The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.
The range is 40 through F4, and the factory default is 60.
Graphic Chek Err
(From page 131, page 138.) Allows overriding of the host setting for the
SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action) command. For more information about the
SGEA command, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual.
•
Enable. The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the SGEA
command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will stop
when a graphic error is detected.
•
Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not
stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character
selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.
The factory default is Enable.
Hexdump mode
(From page 136.) Hexdump mode allows you to place the printer into the “hex
dump” mode, in which the printer outputs a hexadecimal data stream. The
purpose of hexdump mode is to see exactly what data is received by the
printer, in order to debug forms, for example.
When enabled, the hexdump mode translates all host interface data to its
hexadecimal equivalent, then prints the hex code and its printable symbol, if
one exists. Figure 4 shows a partial example of a hex dump.
176
After the printer enters hexdump mode, all characters it prints (including any
in the printer's input buffer) are printed in two forms: as a two-symbol
hexadecimal code, and as the character's printable symbol (if it has one). A
non printable code is printed as a period [.] symbol. Up to 16 characters can
be printed per line of hexdump printout. While the printer is in hexdump mode,
it does not act upon any control codes, other than to print their hexadecimal
equivalents.
The 16 characters printed per line on the hexdump are formatted so that the
16 printable symbols are printed in columns 1 through 16. The 17th column is
blank. Column 18 contains either a p (PI line active) or a blank (PI not active).
Columns 19 and 20 contain the hexadecimal code for the first character,
followed by a blank. The PI line condition and hexadecimal code for the
second character are printed in columns 22, 23, and 24, followed by a blank.
The third through 16th characters are printed in a similar manner. The
hexadecimal code for the 16th character is printed in columns 78, 79, and 80.
NOTE: Values will vary based on printhead width.
Subsequent printing observes the current setting for skip-over perforation,
form length, and top-of-form position parameters.
IMPORTANT
You must have a minimum of 4.1 inches of media installed and have
Label Width set to 4.1 inches. If not, the hexdump data will be truncated
and lost.
If a fault occurs while printing a hexdump, the printer reverts to the normal
fault state. When the fault is cleared, the printer resumes printing the
hexdump (either a partial line with a form feed, or nothing at all). Top-of-form
remains unaffected.
Figure 4. Sample Hex Dump
To begin a hex dump, first place the printer offline and enable the Hex Dump
Mode option from the control panel. Next, place the printer online. Finally,
send data to the printer from the host computer. Any data received from the
host is “dumped” to the printout.
To cancel a hex dump, first place the printer offline. Then, disable the Hex
Dump Mode option from the control panel. The paper may then be advanced
to the next top-of-form.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Horizontal DPI
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as close as possible
to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser
177
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
printer by selecting a horizontal resolution that matches that of the printer that
the file was originally generated for.
Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi, the T5000 is capable
of printing up to 203 (T5204, T5206, T5208) and 300 (T5304, T5306, T5308)
dpi horizontal resolution.
The range is 60-400 dpi, and the factory default is 120 dpi.
Host Command
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
This menu item allows the user to select certain host commands to be ignored
by the printer.
The options are Enable, Ignore All, Ignore CPI, and Ignore LPI.
The factory default is Enable (all host commands accepted by the printer).
Host Form Length (PGL)
(From page 140.) Determines how the physical label size is affected upon
receiving an EXECUTE command.
•
Enable. The physical label length will change to match the form length
(defined in CREATE mode). The physical label size remains at the new
setting until another EXECUTE command is received, or the PRINTER
CONTROL menu settings are changed.
•
Var. Length. The form length is the longest element printed plus the
setting of “Var Form Adjust.”
•
Disable. Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical
label size. Therefore, the size of the form (defined in CREATE mode)
must fit within the current label dimensions, or errors may occur.
NOTE: Changing the form length via the EXECUTE command changes the
LP+ Emulation logical dimensions.
The factory default is Enable.
Host Form Length (IPDS)
(From page 136.) Enables or disables changing the form length by the host.
•
•
Disable. The host is unable to change the form length.
Enable. The host may change the form length.
The factory default is Disable.
Host Form Length (VGL)
(From page 142.) Sets the printer page size.
•
178
Enable. Sets the printer label size equal to Label Length from the host
form length command. (For more information, refer to the IGP/VGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•
Disable. Sets the printer label size equal to the Label Length set in the
front panel under the PRINTER CONTROL menu.
The factory default is Enable.
Host Override
(From page 129, page 131, page 138.) Determines whether the printer
accepts certain commands sent by the host, or continues to use the current
operator panel settings.
•
Disable. Allows these host commands to override operator panel
settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch
(CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on
the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values
will change upon initial selection of the disable option.
•
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.
The factory default is Disable.
Host PI
(From page 144.)
•
•
Disable. The host does not send PI signals.
Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.
The factory default is Disable.
I-2/5 Selection
(From page 141.) This option is added to be compatible with a special IGPX00 customization. Usually, if Interleaved 2/5 bar codes have an odd number
of digits, a leading zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special
IGP-X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at
the end of the bar code instead.
•
•
Leading Zero. A leading zero is inserted in front of the data.
•
X2 DPD. When selected, I-2/5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use
the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for
compatibility issues.
•
Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of
the default modulo 10 check digit.
Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a
leading zero.
The factory default is Leading Zero.
Ignore Ch#1
(From page 143.) Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid
decimal values are from 0 through 255.
The factory default is 0.
179
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Ignore Ch#2
(From page 143.) Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid
decimal values are from 0 through 255.
The factory default is 0.
Ignore Chars
(From page 143.)
•
•
Disable. Character filtering is not enabled.
•
Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore ch#2” to
specify character 2.
•
Char 1&2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore
ch#1” and “Ignore ch#2” to specify values for these characters.
Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore ch#1” to
specify character 1.
The factory default is Disable.
Ignore Dots
(From page 142.)
•
Disable. The VGL expects position values to be specified in tenth inches
and dot rows.
•
Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only
1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.
The factory default is Disable.
Ignore Mode
(From page 141.) This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character
selected under the Select Character menu.
•
•
Disable. The IGP does not ignore any characters.
Enable. The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select Character
menu.
The factory default is Disable.
Ignore Spaces
(From page 143.)
•
Disable. Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
•
Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
The factory default is Disable.
180
Ignore Text
(From page 141.)
•
Disable. When disabled, text in Normal Mode will be printed. Attributes to
be printed depend on the PGL Normal menu setting.
•
Enable. When enabled, any line of text (non-PGL commands) in Normal
mode will be ignored.
The factory default is Disable.
IGP100 Compatibl.
(From page 141.) This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP100 printer output in cases where there are differences.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Intervention Req
(From page 128, page 134.)
•
Send To Host. The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a
printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs.
•
Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer.
The factory default is Send To Host.
Italic Print
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
•
•
•
Disable. Text is printed normally.
Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.
The factory default is Disable.
LAC Approx.
(From page 131.) This submenu controls whether the LAC Approximation
(See your Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual) is used or not.
When set to On, then Approximation is used. When set to Off, Approximation
is not used, and incoming data will print as is.
The factory default is On.
LAC Option
(From page 131.) Allows the host system to load alternate character images
into the printer. This may be used for designing graphics, bar codes, and
charts, or for printing in foreign languages.
•
Enable. Prints the LAC character as defined.
181
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
•
Disable. Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the
currently selected character set.
The factory default is Enable.
Last Char = FF
(From page 129.) Determines the print line position when a form feed
command is the last code encountered in the print buffer.
•
•
On. Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form.
Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.
NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.
If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,
the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next
form, regardless of the setting of this option.
The factory default is On.
Lead-in Chars
(From page 129, page 131, page 138.) You can enable additional printer
features which are not accessible through standard coax emulations. To
access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The
commands must have a start and end code. Three sets (each containing a
start and end code) are available:
•
Set 1
start code: <%
end code: >
•
Set 2
start code:¬¬
end code: $
•
Set 3
start code: _%
end code: _
The factory default is Set 1<%>.
Left Margin
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far left edge of the page,
and column numbering increments from left to right.
The range is 0-369 characters, and the factory default is 0 characters.
Logical Buf Size
(From page 134.) Refers to the size of the printer buffer, which should be set
the same as the host screen (buffer) size. If the host screen size is unknown,
use 1920.
The options are 960, 1920, 2560, 3440, and 3564.
The factory default is 1920.
182
LPI
(From page 142.) This menu item selects the number of lines printed per inch.
The range is 6-10, and the factory default is 6.
Max PI 16
(From page 144.)
•
•
Enable. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will
always move 1 line.
The factory default is Enable.
Max. Print Width
(From page 129, page 131, page 138.) Set the maximum print width the
printer will print when using a C/T host interface. Set for 13.2 inches when
printing files larger than the width of the printer. All data exceeding the width
of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated.
•
•
13.2 inches
Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)
The factory default is 13.2 inches.
Midline PY (includes ^PN)
(From page 143.)
•
Disable. The Graphics mode Enabled command, ^PY, must be the first
three characters of a line.
•
Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.
The factory default is Disable.
NL at MPP+1
(From page 128, page 134.) Specifies the linespacing action when the
printline exceeds the rightmost print position and text continues from the
leftmost print position on a new line.
•
On. Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current
position.
•
Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.
The factory default is On.
Null Handling
(From page 134.) This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank
spaces or ignore them. If nulls are ignored, the print position does not move.
•
Space. Treats nulls as spaces.
183
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
•
Ignore. Ignores nulls.
The factory default is Space.
Null Suppression (Coax)
(From page 129.) This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank
spaces or ignore them. If nulls are ignored, the print position does not move.
•
•
Off. Ignores nulls.
On. Treats nulls as spaces.
The factory default is Off.
Null Suppression (IPDS)
(From page 136.)
•
Disable. When disabled, an exception is generated when the IPDS data
stream contains a 0x00. Disable is the default.
•
Enable. When enabled, this option ignores the EBCDIC value 0x00 in the
IPDS data stream.
The factory default is Disable.
Offpage Errors
(From page 143.)
•
Disable. Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the
right edge of the page.
•
Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right
edge of the page.
The factory default is Disable.
Optimized Ratio
(From page 140.) This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar
codes including Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility
with the IGP-X00 printers.
•
•
Disable. Use standard bar code ratios.
Enable. Select the alternate bar code ratios.
The factory default is Disable.
Overstrike
(From page 146, page 151.) Overstrike determines the action required when
a line is printed over a previous line because a carriage return was received
without a line feed.
•
•
Enable. Prints the second line on top of the first line.
Disable. Replaces the characters from the first line with the second line.
The factory default is Enable.
184
PA1
(From page 128, page 134.) PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline
state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character Set (SCS) data
stream is active. This function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when
the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host
when the printer is put back in online mode. Refer to the Coax/Twinax
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information about SCS.
NOTE: Selecting the PA1 menu item again (“PA1 DISABLED” appears on the
operator panel) or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending
PA1 function.
PA2
(From page 128, page 134.) PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the offline
state and the coax SCS data stream is active. This function displays the “PA2
ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special
operator request to the host when the printer is put back in online mode.
NOTE: Selecting the PA2 menu item again (“PA2 DISABLED” appears on the
operator panel) or selecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending
PA2 function.
Page Rotation
(From page 136.) This option rotates the physical IPDS page.
The options are 0, 90, 180, and 270.
The factory default is 0.
PGL Normal
(From page 141.) This option determines whether PGL prints the text data in
NORMAL mode according to the LP+ menu settings or whether PGL will print
the text data according to its own internal state.
The options are LP+ Menu (the factory default) and PGL Menu.
PI Slew Range
(From page 140.) You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
•
16. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
The factory default is 16.
Position Aft FF
(From page 128.) Allows you to select the location of the print position after a
form feed command is sent.
•
Off. Sets the printer to print at position 2 of the first print line on the next
form.
185
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
•
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the
next form.
The factory default is Off.
Power on IGP/PGL
(From page 141.) You can set the IGP/PGL feature so that it is enabled or
disabled when the printer is powered on.
•
Enable. The IGP/PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The
IGP/PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
•
Disable. The IGP/PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The
IGP/PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)
The factory default is Enable.
Power-up ^F
(From page 142.)
•
•
Disable.
Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default, and selects
the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the
VGL to ignore carriage returns, line feeds and all characters below 20 hex
sent from the host.
The factory default is Disable.
Power-up ^PY
(From page 142.)
•
•
Disable.
Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.
The factory default is Disable.
Power-up ^X
(From page 142.)
•
•
Disable.
Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default, and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored
until a ^A command is received.
The factory default is Disable.
Primary Subset
(From page 145, page 150.) This menu item allows selection of the desired
primary character subset used by the printer. The factory default is ASCII
(USA).
186
Print Char. Set
(From page 146, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 155.)
Selecting this menu item by pressing the ↵ key causes the printer to print the
currently selected character set.
Printer PI
(From page 144.)
•
•
Disable. The LP+ Emulation is configured with the PI line disabled.
Enable. The LP+ Emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.
The factory default is Disable.
Printer Select
(From page 151, page 155.)
•
•
Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
The factory default is Disable.
Prop Line Length
(From page 144.)
•
Enable. The position of the next graphic element will be determined by
the physical length of a text string (when using a proportional spaced
font).
•
Disable. The position of the next graphic element will be determined as if
the font was monospaced (all characters had the same specified width).
The factory default is Enable.
Prop. Spacing
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
•
Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column
in the printed text will line up.
The factory default is Enable.
187
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
PSeries Dbl High
(From page 146.) This menu option allows printing compatibility between the
current and older models of Printronix printers.
•
•
Normal. This is normal Double High printing for current model printers.
P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers printed two dot rows higher, this
option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match
the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).
The factory default is Normal.
Repeat Form Opt
(From page 141.)
•
Enable. Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for PGL, thereby
resulting in increased printer throughput. This option provides no speed
benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and should be disabled
under those circumstances.
•
Disable. Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to
one another.
The factory default is Enable.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command (ESC @ or
ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration is
loaded.
•
Disable. The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset
command is executed.
•
Power up config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is executed.
•
Current config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
•
Factory config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
The factory default is Disable.
Right Margin
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
Set in characters. Character zero is defined as the far right edge of the page,
and column numbering increments from right to left.
The range is 0-369 characters, and the factory default is 0 characters.
188
Rot. Char Size
(From page 143.)
•
Adjusted. Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters
have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size
parameters.
•
Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters will be the same size as
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.
The factory default is Adjusted.
Scalable Size
(From page 141.) This option determines whether scalable characters are
sized based on normal scaling or based on the size of block characters. If the
option Block is set, then the scalable character are made to be the same size
as block characters in the old IGP-X00 printers.
The options are Normal (the factory default) and Block.
SCS Buffer Cntrl
(From page 128.) This option functions like the Early Print Complete feature
(“Early Print Cmpl (Coax)” on page 170) but is for SCS only.
•
Don’t Wait. The printer does not wait until the buffer is printed before
sending the print complete back to the host.
•
Wait Until Done. The printer waits until the buffer has printed before
sending the print complete back to the host.
NOTE: If set to Wait Until Done, printer speed may be reduced.
The factory default is Don’t Wait.
Select Char
(From page 141.) Instructs the IGP which decimal character (0-255) to ignore
from the host.
The range is 0-255, and the factory default is 0.
Select CPI
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.) This menu item
selects the characters per inch (CPI) value.
The options are 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0 CPI.
The factory default is 10.0 CPI.
Select LPI
(From page 140, page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.) This is
the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6
inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
189
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
The options are 6.0, 8.0, and 10.3 LPI.
The factory default is 6.0 LPI.
Select SFCC (PGL)
(From page 140.) You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as
the Special Function Control Code (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the
following data is a PGL command.
The range is 1-255, and the factory default is 126.
Select SFCC (P-Series)
(From page 146.) This P-Series feature allows you to select an ASCII code
which defines the Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command code
value. The factory default value is hex 01, but the P-Series options allow
selection of any value ranging from hex 00 through hex 7F. This powerful
feature permits the SFCC code to be assigned a value compatible with the
application environment where the P-Series jobs originate. The most
commonly used values include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
SOH (01 hex)
ESC (1B hex)
ETX (03 hex)
Circumflex (5e hex) - also called caret (^)
Tilde (7F hex) - (~)
NOTE: Non-Printable ASCII code values range from hex 00 through hex 1F
and also include hex 7F. Printable ASCII code values range from hex
20 through hex 7E. If a printable code value is chosen to define the
SFCC code value, you must ensure that the printer data stream will
not contain the same code value in printable text. Otherwise text
containing the character for the SFCC control code value may be
incorrectly processed as an SFCC command causing print errors.
The range is 0-7F, and the factory default is 1.
Select SO Char
(From page 141, page 143.) Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0
through 255 to be used in place of SO (Shift Out) as the control code which
allows access for the alternate set of control function characters. See the
description of the Code 128 barcodes in the PGL Programmer's Reference
Manual for details.
The range is 0-255, and the factory default is 14.
190
Set Text Orientn
(From page 129, page 131, page 138.) Specifies the direction in which
characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages
which are printed right to left instead of left to right.
•
Control By Host. Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the “Set
Text Orientation” command from the host.
•
•
Left to Right.
Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.
The factory default is Control By Host.
SFCC
(From page 142.) This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The
default value is the caret ^ (decimal 94). Valid values are 17 through 255. Run
a configuration printout to determine the currently selected SFCC.
The range is 17-255, and the factory default is 94.
SFCC Char (SPC Coax, SPC Twinax)
(From page 134, page 135.) Determines what character is printed when an
EBCDIC Logical Not character ¬ (Hex 5F) is received from the host.
•
•
•
•
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ^^$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
The factory default is Set 1 <%>.
SFCC d command
(From page 146.) This menu option is for backward compatibility.
•
Even dot plot. This option interprets the SFCC d command as even dot
plot.
•
Double high. This option interprets the SFCC d command as double
high. Select this option for backward compatibility.
The factory default is Even dot plot.
Skip Cmd Prefix
(From page 140.) Stands for Skip Command Prefix. This parameter
determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is
received.
•
•
Enable. The printer ignores all data before a PGL command.
Disable. The printer will print all data before a PGL command.
The factory default is Enable.
191
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Slash 0
(From page 140, page 142.) This parameter allows you to print the numeral
“0” with or without the slash. This option applies to all character sets except
OCR A and OCR B.
•
•
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
The factory default is Disable.
Slashed Zero
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
The factory default is Disable.
Slew Relative
(From page 149.) “Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter
determines the number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when
an EVFU Slew Relative command is received.
The options are 1-15 lines (the factory default) and 1-16 lines.
SPC Char Set
(From page 135.) Allows you to select the print language character set. See
page 135 for the options.
The factory default is 0500 Internat 5.
SPC Null Supp
(From page 134.) SPC Null Supp stands for SPC Null Suppression.
•
•
Disable. Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.
Enable. Treats nulls as blank spaces.
The factory default is Disable.
SPC Space Supp
(From page 134.) This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is
used in LU3/DSC/DSE mode only.
•
•
Disable. Treats nulls and spaces normally.
Enable. If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls, the line will be
discarded.
The factory default is Disable.
192
SPC Type (SPC Coax Setup)
(From page 134.)
•
PTX NI (Printronix Non-impact). This option causes the printer to not
line wrap at 132 characters.
•
Avatar Comp. This option causes the printer to line wrap at 132
characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per
line.
The factory default is PTX NI.
SPC Type (SPC Twinax Setup)
(From page 135.) Allows you to select a convertor which mimics a specific
type of external protocol convertor:
•
•
•
•
MODE PTX NI for Printronix non-impact
MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor
MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor
MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor
The factory default is MODE PTX NI.
Standard Sets
(From page 140, page 144.) This menu item allows the user to select various
character sets available from the “Character Group” menu item.
The options are Standard, Arabic, Cyrillic, European, Greek, Hebrew, and
Turkish Sets.
The factory default is Standard Sets.
Text Length
(From page 142.) Text Length is the printable length on the page below the
top margin. It is in character lines at the lpi in effect when the new value is
entered.
The range is 1-255, and the factory default is 66.
193
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Text Position
(From page 147, page 149, page 151, page 153, page 155.)
Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space.
•
•
Top of Line. Text is positioned at the top of the line space.
Bottom of Line. Text is positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi line
space. The following example shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line
text positions:
Dot
Row
Top of Line Space
Bottom of 8 LPI Line Space
Bottom of 6 LPI Line Space
Text Position
Top of Line
Text Position
Bottom of Line
The factory default is Bottom of Line.
Top Margin
(From page 146, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
Defined in linespaces, starting from line zero at the top of the page and
incrementing from the top down.
The range is 0-451 linespaces, and the factory default is 0 linespaces.
Translate Table
(From page 129.)
•
Default. The option is disabled. The table is not stored in the real
translation table until the option is enabled.
•
Downloaded. The option is enabled. The LU3 Translation Table is
loaded from the buffer into the permanent table.
The factory default is Default.
Translation Tbl (Coax)
(From page 128.) Prints out SCS and DSC/DSE tables of the coax interface's
current character set. This operation is valid only when the coax interface is
selected as the current interface.
194
Translation Tbl (SPC Coax)
(From page 134.) Prints out a table of the coax interface's current character
set. This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected.
Translation Tbl (SPC Twinax)
(From page 135.) Prints out a table of the twinax interface's current character
set. This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is selected.
Translation Tbl (TN5250, Twinax)
(From page 138, page 131.) Prints out a table of the twinax interface’s current
character set. This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is the
current interface.
True Vert 1/10
(From page 142.)
•
Disable. When disabled and in High Resolution, a vertical line’s length in
one inch and 1/10 inch increments is interpreted as 70/72 inch and 7/72
inch respectively.
•
Enable. When enabled, a vertical line’s length is interpreted exactly,
which is 72/72 inch in one inch increments.
The factory default is Disable.
Truncate Alpha
(From page 142.)
•
Enable. Prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off Page Error) if
alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right side of the
form.
•
Disable.
The factory default is Enable.
Twinax Type
(From page 131.) This parameter defines the printer emulation as follows:
•
•
•
•
IPDS 256 Bytes
IPDS 1024 Bytes
5225
4234
After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host.
The factory default is IPDS 256 Bytes.
195
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Typeface
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
•
Letter Gothic. Letter Gothic is a non-proportional font where all of the
characters take up the same amount of space when printed.
•
Courier. Courier is a non-proportional (monospaced) font where all
characters take up the same amount of space when printed.
•
OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
The factory default is Letter Gothic.
Uniform Fonts
(From page 144.)
•
Disable. The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will be
cancelled when the graphics pass is complete.
•
Enable. The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will also
be used in Standard Graphics Mode and Normal Mode.
The factory default is Disable.
UPC Descenders (PGL)
(From page 141.) This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders
when human readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
•
Always. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there
is no human readable data.
•
Never. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no
human readable data.
•
Only With PDF. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only
when the PDF command is presented.
The factory default is Always.
UPC Descenders (VGL)
(From page 142.)
•
Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is
no human readable data.
•
Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is
no human readable data.
The factory default is Enable.
196
Upr. Case Select
(From page 149.) Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it
receives from the host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed
in uppercase.
•
Disable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
lowercase, and uppercase characters received from the computer as
uppercase.
•
Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters
received from the computer are printed as uppercase.
The factory default is Disable.
User-Def Ratio
(From page 141.) This option is used when the user has a predefined barcode
ratio and does not want to use the standard default ratio (X1).
•
•
Enable. Lets the user define the barcode ratio.
Disable. Sets the barcode ratio to the standard default ratio.
The factory default is Enable.
Var Form Adjust
(From page 140.) This specifies an amount (in tenths of inches) to add to the
length of variable-length forms. Variable-length forms are those that use a
semicolon at the end of the CREATE command:
~CREATE;<FORMNAME>;0. Typically, variable-length forms are determined
by the elements within the form. The longest form element becomes the
overall form length. This option allows an additional space to be added to the
form length.
The range is 00.0 to 03.0 inches, and the factory default is 00.0 inches.
Var Form Type
(From page 140.)
•
•
Add Nothing. (The default.) When selected, no action is taken.
•
Add ;X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page
length (the Label Length menu under MEDIA CONTROL).
Add ;0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed
element.
Vertical DPI
(From page 145, page 148, page 150, page 150, page 152, page 154.)
This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as close as possible
to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser
printer by selecting a vertical resolution that matches that of the printer that
the file was originally generated for.
197
Chapter
3
Emulation Submenus
Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 DPI, the thermal printer is
capable of printing up to 203 (T5204, T5206, T5208) and 300 (T5304, T5306,
T5308) DPI vertical resolution.
The range is 72-400 DPI, and the factory default is 72 DPI.
VPA Check
(From page 136.)
•
Enable. The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the
logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area, the printer reports
and error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control command
setting requires error reporting.
•
Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area.
The factory default is Enable.
Width Limit
(From page 143.) When enabled, the system will limit the length and width for
expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 5, which shows the maximum
width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0 through
4.0 inches).
The factory default is Disable.
Table 5. Width Limit Table
198
Height
Param.
Max. Width
Allowed
Height
Param.
Max. Width
Allowed
00
99
21
51
01
99
22
53
02
3
23
56
03
6
24
58
04
8
25
61
05
11
26
63
06
13
27
66
07
16
28
68
08
18
29
71
09
21
30
73
10
23
31
76
11
26
32
78
12
28
33
81
13
31
34
83
Table 5. Width Limit Table
14
33
35
86
15
36
36
88
16
38
37
91
17
41
38
93
18
43
39
96
19
46
40
98
20
48
199
Chapter
3
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Auto Calibrate*
Checkerboard
Grey
Grid
Left Test
Right Test
E-Net Test Page(1)
1 Page
2 Pages
Current Config
Barcode Demo
Valid. Report(2)
Test Count
Continuous*
Software Build
XXX Ver. XX
Hex Dump Mode
Disable*
5 Pages
10 Pages
Enable
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
DRAM Installed
XX Megabytes
Ptr On Time
XX.X Hours
Ptr Media Dist
XX Inches
Head Print Dist
XX Inches
Head On Time
XX.X Hours
Reset Head Data
Head Type
XX DPI
Head Voltage
XX.XX+X.XX volts
* = Factory Default
200
1
Appears only if the Ethernet Interface
adapter is installed.
2
Appears only if the validator is installed.
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
Printer Tests
This menu item selects the test pattern to be printed. These patterns are
typically used to check the print quality and operation of the printer. The
following tests can be selected.
•
Auto Calibrate. Senses paperout, perforation, gap, or mark, and
calibrates the printer for the currently installed media.
•
Checkerboard. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements,
quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
•
Grey. This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and
uneven print quality.
•
•
Grid. This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and uneven print quality.
•
Left Test. This pattern contains a series of ladder-type bar code symbols.
The first prints four ladder symbols and the last prints a single ladder
symbol. This pattern helps to identify ribbon wrinkle problems.
•
Right Test. This pattern contains a series of ladder-type bar code
symbols, starting with four, and decrementing by one symbol on each
print until a single symbol prints. This pattern helps to identify ribbon
wrinkle problems.
•
E-NET Test Page. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet
Interface adapter. This menu item appears only if the Ethernet Interface
adapter is installed.
•
Barcode Demo. Prints text and barcodes with the barcodes positioned at
the left and right margins of the standard label media supplied with the
printer. The test automatically produces output for 4, 6, and 8 inch printers
at 203 dpi and 300 dpi.
•
Valid. Report. This item appears only if the validator is installed. Prints a
report of the validation statistics since the printer was turned on or since
the last data reset.
Current Config. Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify
the text print quality.
Once the desired test pattern has been selected, printing is initiated by
pressing the ↵ key. In the case of the Checkerboard, Grey and Grid test
patterns, the number of times the pattern will be repeated is determined by
the setting of the Test Count menu item. If the Test Count menu item is set at
Continuous, printing is stopped by pressing the ↵ key again.
The factory default is Auto Calibrate.
Test Count
This menu item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be
printed.
The options are Continuous, 1 Page, 2 Pages, 5 Pages, and 10 Pages.
The factory default is Continuous.
201
Chapter
3
DIAGNOSTICS
Software Build
The reference number, which includes the program file part number and
revision number, of the software installed in the printer, e.g., 358186 V1.07G.
Hex Dump Mode
•
•
Disable.
Enable. The printer prints out data sent from the host in hexadecimal
format.
Also see page 176.
The factory default is Disable.
Print Error Log
Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults (RIBBON FAULT,
PRINT HEAD HOT) are stored in the error log.
Clear Error Log
Clears entries in the error log.
DRAM Installed
Displays the amount of DRAM installed.
Ptr On Time
Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on.
This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Ptr Media Dist
Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media.
This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Head Print Dist
Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head Data
operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Head On Time
Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since the last
Reset Head Data operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burnin testing.
202
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
Reset Head Data
Resets all printhead statistics values (Head Prt Dist and Head On Time) to
zero.
Head Type
Displays the printhead dot density.
Head Voltage
Displays the applied printhead voltage.
203
Chapter
3
PARALLEL PORT
PARALLEL PORT
PARALLEL PORT
Port Type
IEEE 1284*(1)
Disable
Centronics(1)
Ethernet(2)
Data Bit 8(3)
Enable*
Disable
PI Ignored(3)
Enable*
Disable
Buffer Size in K
16*
1-16
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
5-60 sec.
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
Data Polarity(3)
Standard*
Inverted
Resp. Polarity(3)
Standard*
Inverted
Busy on Strobe(3)
Enable*
Disable
Latch Data On(3)
Leading*
Trailing
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Advanced User
is enabled (in the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
1
Does not display when Ethernet is installed.
2
Available only when Ethernet is installed.
3 Available
only when the Centronics option is enabled
(in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT).
204
PARALLEL PORT Submenus
PARALLEL PORT Submenus
Port Type
This menu item selects the type of printer parallel port interface to be used
with the host.
The options are IEEE 1284, Disable, Centronics, and Ethernet.
NOTE: The Ethernet option is available only if Ethernet is installed. When
Ethernet is installed, the IEEE 1284 and Centronics options do not
display.
The factory default is IEEE 1284.
Data Bit 8
•
Enable. The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are
used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be
accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and enable the Host PI
configuration option (under the PI Ignored option).
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data
bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot
access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access
characters in the hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
The factory default is Enable.
PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
•
Enable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control
codes.
•
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
The factory default is Enable.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet
buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16 Kbytes.
205
Chapter
3
PARALLEL PORT
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second print job is received
by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host
from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support
this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it
for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.
The options are 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and Off.
The factory default is 1/4 second.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in
order to service the other ports.
The range is 5-60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
Report Status
•
Disable. When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports
the fault to the host.
•
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active
port.
The factory default is Disable.
Prime Signal
•
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the Prime Signal.
•
Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the Prime Signal.
The factory default is Disable.
206
PARALLEL PORT Submenus
Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your
host computer.
•
•
Standard. Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.
The factory default is Standard.
Resp. Polarity
The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity
of your host computer.
•
•
Standard. Does not invert the response signal.
Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
The factory default is Standard.
Busy on Strobe
•
•
Enable. Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
The factory default is Enable.
Latch Data On
Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data
strobe signal.
The options are Leading (the factory default) and Trailing.
207
Chapter
3
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
Port Type
RS 232*
RS 422
Disable
Baud Rate
9600 BAUD*
19200 BAUD
38400 BAUD
57600 BAUD
600 BAUD
1200 BAUD
2400 BAUD
4800 BAUD
Word Length
8*
7
Stop Bits
1*
2
Parity
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Data Protocol
XON / XOFF*
ETX / ACK
ACK / NAK
Series1 1 Char
Series1 2 Char
2 sec
4 sec
115200 BAUD
Sense
DTR
Buffer Size in K
16*
1-16
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec.
1 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
5-60 sec.
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Data Term Ready
True*
Request to Send
On-Line and BNF*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
Poll Character
00 Hex*
00-FF Hex
Poll Response
0 ms*
0-30 ms
Idle Response
Disable*
Enable
One Char Enquiry
Disable*
Enable
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
On-Line
False
True
Notes:
Printer Status
Framing Errors
208
Disable*
Enable*
ENQ/STX
Disable
ENQ
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only
when you enable Advanced User (in
the PRINTER CONTROL menu).
SERIAL PORT Submenus
SERIAL PORT Submenus
Port Type
This menu item selects the type of printer serial port interface, RS 232 or
RS 422, to be used with its host. The serial port can also be disabled.
The factory default is RS 232.
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The options for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to
use RS-422 to prevent data loss. You also may need to increase the
Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte) to improve
performance.
The factory default is 9600.
Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host
computer.
The factory default is 8.
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or 2 stop bits can
be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the
host computer.
The factory default is 1.
Parity
The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None. The setting must match
the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.
The factory default is None.
209
Chapter
3
SERIAL PORT
Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host
interface requirements.
210
•
XON / XOFF. The printer controls the flow of communication from the host
by turning the transmission on and off. In some situations, such as when
the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast, the printer
will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character. An
XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is
less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host keeps
sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will continue to
send an XOFF for every 16 characters received. When cleared, the
printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data does not have any End
of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol.
•
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX
signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has
received the entire block of data.
•
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has
accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device
did not receive the transmission.
•
Series1 1 Char. The printer controls the flow of communication from the
host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters
sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75
percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response
character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer
full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.
Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate
response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the
printer will send a response character every two seconds while the
number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer
size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character
xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will
send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll
Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n
milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed
from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause
problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g. control codes, bit
image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character
and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no
effect, and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from
buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.
SERIAL PORT Submenus
The response characters are described below.
Printer State
Online and Buffer Empty
•
CR
Online and Buffer Full
3
Offline and Buffer Empty
0
Offline and Buffer Full
2
Series1 2 Char. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series 1
Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The response
characters are described in the following table:
Printer State
•
Response
Response
Online and Buffer Empty
1 CR
Online and Buffer Full
3 CR
Offline and Buffer Empty
0 CR
Offline and Buffer Full
2 CR
DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to
the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send
a high signal; if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal. DTR tells
the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during an
unsafe condition, data will be lost.) DTR is not available when RS-422 is
selected.
The factory default is XON / XOFF.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port
buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to
increase the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default to 16 Kbytes
to improve performance.
The factory default is 16.
211
Chapter
3
SERIAL PORT
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.
The options are 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and Off.
The factory default is 1/4 sec.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after certain period of time, it needs to Timeout in
order to service the other ports.
The range is 5-60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
Report Status
When a fault condition occurs in the printer, normally only the active port
reports the fault to the host. With this menu item enabled, the port will report
any fault even when it is not the current, active port.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Data Term Ready
Stands for Data Terminal Ready. This configuration is part of hardware flow
control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is
generated. This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data.
•
•
True. Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
•
Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
•
On-Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
The factory default is True.
212
SERIAL PORT Submenus
Request to Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or
not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
On-Line and BNF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and
the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the
internal serial buffer is full.
•
•
•
On-Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
The factory default is On-Line and BNF.
Poll Character
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this
character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the
printer (see Series1 protocol).
The range is 00-FF Hex, and the factory default is 00 Hex.
Poll Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the
printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the
response.
The range is 0-30 ms, and the factory default is 0 ms.
Idle Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol.
•
•
Disable.
Enable. The printer sends a response character every two seconds while
the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer
size.
The factory default is Disable.
213
Chapter
3
SERIAL PORT
One Char Enquiry
The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from
the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to
turn on and off this feature.
Table 6. One Char Enquiry Response Characters
Printer State
Response (hex)
Online and Buffer Not Full
20
Online and Buffer Full
21
Offline and Buffer Not Full
22
Offline and Buffer Full
23
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is
set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series1, One Char Enquiry is automatically
disabled.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Printer Status
•
•
•
Disable. Printer status ignored.
ENQ/STX (see Table 7).
ENQ (see Table 8).
When enabled, the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a
status byte to the host. The type of status byte is determined by a Front Panel
Menu selection. The selections allowed are ENQ/STX and ENQ. The ENQ is
removed from the data stream.
Table 7. ENQ/STX Status Byte
Bit
214
Printer Status
0
Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full.
1
Set when the printer is offline.
2
Clear during a paper out or RibbonMinder fault.
3
Always set.
4
Set during a Head Open fault.
5
Set during a buffer overflow fault.
6
Set during a parity or framing error fault.
7
Always clear.
SERIAL PORT Submenus
Table 8. ENQ Status Byte
Bit
Printer Status
0
Set when the label has printed.
1
Set when the label is presented.
2
Set while the printer is online.
3
Always set.
4
Set printing in the batch mode.
5
Set during a Ribbon fault.
6
Set during a Paper Out fault.
7
Set during a Head Open fault.
The factory default is Disable.
Framing Errors
These are possible errors that can occur when serial interface settings of the
printer do not match those of the host computer.
•
Enable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will display on the
control panel.
•
Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the
control panel.
The factory default is Enable.
215
Chapter
3
C/T PORT
C/T PORT
C/T PORT(1)
Port Type
Twinax*
Coax
Device Address
Address 1*
Address 0-6
Image Buf Size
4K*
2K
Timeout
10 sec.*
5-60 sec.
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Disable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
1
Appears only if the CTHI option is installed.
C/T PORT Submenus
Port Type
This menu item selects the desired active CTHI interface and appears only
when the CTHI option is installed.
The factory default is Twinax.
Device Address
Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data
and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique
device address. After the address has been changed, a Power On Reset
(POR) status is sent to the host.
The factory default is 1.
Image Buf Size
Allows you to select 4K or 2K as the image buffer size. This option is only
valid when the printer emulates 3287. For the 4234 emulation, the buffer size
is fixed at 4K. A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is put online.
The factory default is 4K.
216
C/T PORT Submenus
Timeout
This menu item allows the user to set the time that, when the printer has not
received data from its host, it will begin to service all other host ports looking
for data to print.
The range is 5-60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
Report Status
When a fault condition occurs in the printer, normally only the active port
reports the fault to the host. With this menu item enabled, the port will report
any fault even when it is not the current, active port.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
217
Chapter
3
ETHERNET PARAMS
ETHERNET PARAMS
ETHERNET(1)
PARAMS
IP Address(2)
SEG1
000*
0-255
SEG2
000*
0-255
SEG3
000*
0-255
SEG4
000*
0-255
SEG1
000*
0-255
SEG2
000*
0-255
SEG3
000*
0-255
SEG4
000*
0-255
Gateway Address(2)
Subnet Mask(2)
SEG1
000*
0-255
SEG2
000*
0-255
SEG3
000*
0-255
SEG4
000*
0-255
MAC Address
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Novell Protocol
Enable*
Disable
Nest Serv Type
Auto*
Bindery
NetBIOS Protocol
Enable*
Disable
Novell Frame
Auto Sensing*
Ethernet II
NDS
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet 802.2
802.2 Snap
Notes:
* = Factory Default
218
1
Appears only if an Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) is installed.
2
This menu includes four submenus (i.e., SEG1, SEG2, SEG3, SEG4). To
move through the submenus, press ↓ or ↑. To move through the numerical
options (i.e., 0-255) of a selected submenu, press + or −.
C/T PORT Submenus
ETHERNET
PARAMS(1)
(cont. from
prev. page)
ASCII Data Port
9100*
0-65535(2)
IPDS Data Port(3)
5001*
0-65535(2)
Keep Alive Timer
3 Minutes*
2-10 Minutes
Ethernet Speed
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
DHCP
Disable*
Enable
Job Control
Standard*
Enhanced
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
Off
Notes:
* = Factory Default
1
Appears only if an Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) is installed.
2
Set the port number that works with your host system.
3
Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed.
219
Chapter
3
ETHERNET PARAMS
ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus
IP Address
This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP protocol. If the
IP Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and read-only.
The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
NOTE: When changing the IP Address, the printer resets the Network
Interface Card (NIC) when the printer is placed online. When the
printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. After
the NIC has completed its initialization, the LCD displays E-NET INIT
to signal that the NIC and printer are in the initialization process.
When both the NIC and printer have completed initialization, the LCD
displays E-NET READY.
Gateway Address
This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP/IP protocol. If
the Gateway Address is assigned by Bootp, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
NOTE: When changing the Gateway Address, the printer resets the NIC
when the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the
LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. After the NIC has completed its
initialization, the LCD displays E-NET INIT to signal that the NIC and
printer are in the initialization process. When both the NIC and printer
have completed initialization, the LCD displays E-NET READY.
Subnet Mask
This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP/IP protocol. If the
Subnet Mask is assigned by Bootp, Arp or DHCP, it is dynamic and read-only.
The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
NOTE: When changing the Subnet Mask, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. After the NIC has completed its
initialization, the LCD displays E-NET INIT to signal that the NIC and
printer are in the initialization process. When both the NIC and printer
have completed initialization, the LCD displays E-NET READY.
MAC Address
This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each NIC.
It is read-only.
220
ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus
Novell Protocol
•
•
Enable. The NIC will respond to the Novell protocol.
Disable. The NIC does not recognize the Novell protocol.
The factory default is Enable.
Nest Serv Type
You can change the Nest Server using this option, but consult your
administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Auto (the factory default), Bindery, and NDS.
NetBIOS Protocol
•
•
Enable. The NIC will respond to the NetBIOS protocol.
Disable. The NIC does not recognize the NetBIOS protocol.
The factory default is Enable.
Novell Frame
This menu option provides selection of the frame type for the Novell protocol.
For the definition of each frame type, refer to the appropriate
Novell-authorized documents.
The factory default is Auto Sensing.
ASCII Data Port
This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data
port number needs to match your host system setting.
The range is 0 - 65535, and the factory default is 9100.
IPDS Data Port (IPDS emulation only)
This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs.
The range is 0 - 65536, and the factory default is 5001.
Keep Alive Timer
This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. Keep in mind that with the
Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the
print job has terminated.
The range is 2-10 minutes, and the factory default is 3 minutes.
221
Chapter
3
ETHERNET PARAMS
Ethernet Speed
This menu appears only if a 10/100Base-T Network Interface Card (NIC) is
installed.
The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to allow
compatibility with different systems and networks:
•
Auto Select. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform an auto detection
scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half
Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•
10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•
100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
The factory default is Auto Select.
DHCP
You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your
administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Job Control
•
Standard. The NIC waits for the entire job to be received before it
indicates the job is done.
•
Enhanced. The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it
indicates the job is done.
•
Off. There is no synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
The factory default is Standard.
NOTE: For detailed information about using the NIC, refer to the Network
Interface Card User’s Manual.
222
Flash Memory
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
Flash Memory
Flash memory retains its contents when printer power is turned off. (Compare
this to RAM, which loses its contents when power is removed.) Flash memory
is contained in an 80-pin 4MB (or optional 10MB) SIMM (Single Inline Memory
Module) at location J38 on the controller board.
Printer emulation and operating system software are loaded into flash
memory at the factory, but you will install software in some situations:
•
•
•
•
The IPDS or Expansion-C/T options are added after the printer is installed
A printer software upgrade is installed
The printer controller board has been replaced
The flash memory SIMM has been replaced
Emulation and operating system software are stored on a CD. You will copy
the appropriate file to your computer’s hard disk, then download that file to the
printer.
IMPORTANT
When downloading emulation and operating system software to the
printer, all other optional font files, customer-supplied logos, setup files,
and TIFF files will be erased. You will then need to reload those files.
Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have all the
necessary files on hand.
You can load software through the serial, parallel, or Ethernet NIC port of the
printer:
•
If you are going to load memory through the serial or parallel port of the
printer, see “Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software” on
page 223. The load commands are different, depending on the printer
port you use. These differences are explained in the note following
step 22, page 226.
•
If the printer has the NIC installed, see “Downloading Software Through
The Network Interface Card (NIC)” on page 227.
223
Chapter
3
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
Downloading Software Through The
Serial Or Parallel Port
1. Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Installing new software
erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore the
printer configurations.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of an
IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS™ or MS-DOS operating
system, go to step 9. If not, go to step 4.
4. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
5. Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interfaces.
6. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS or
MS-DOS operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is already
in use. The load commands are different if you use this port, as
described in the note after step 22.
7. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
8. Plug the AC power cord into the printer.
9. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the and ↓ keys. Without
releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding down the and ↓
keys.
10. When you see “TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT” on the LCD,
release the and ↓ keys.
11. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD
before proceeding. This can take up to 30 seconds to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
12. Press the + key. “SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT=CENTRONICS” appears
on the LCD.
NOTE: The default port is CENTRONICS; this is the standard load through
the parallel port. If you want to use the default, continue at step 14.
13. Press + again to cycle through the download ports available in the printer:
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)
DEBUG
224
Downloading Software Through The Serial Or Parallel Port
14. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,
press ↵. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = <your selection>” appears on
the display.
15. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive.
16. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer.
Figure 5. Navigating to the Appropriate Emulation File on the CD
17. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the appropriate file on the CD based
on the printer model number and desired emulation, e.g., T5000IGP.
(See Figure 5.)
18. Make note of the file name, which is a six digit number plus .exe,
e.g., 123456.exe.
This is the file you will download into the printer.
225
Chapter
3
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
Figure 6. Copying the Emulation File to the Download Directory
19. Copy the file to the download directory.
NOTE: You may need to hold Ctrl to make sure a + appears to the right of
the pointer. (See Figure 6.)
20. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
21. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
22. At the command prompt on the computer type:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 18. This command
decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into
the flash memory on the printer controller board.
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, enter
the following command:
filename.exe -pb2 <Enter>
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of MS-DOS
can use. The baud rate information entered in the following
commands must match the selection you made in step 13.
If you are loading the file through the printer serial port, enter the
following commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
filename.exe -pbc1<Enter>
226
Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card (NIC)
CAUTION
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the controller
board and NIC card.
While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status.
23. When the new program has successfully loaded into memory and the
printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
24. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
25. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
26. Power off the computer.
27. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 6,
disconnect it from the computer and printer.
28. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, reconfigure the printer
and reload any optional font files.
Downloading Software Through The
Network Interface Card (NIC)
1. Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Installing new software
erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore the
printer configurations.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the and ↓ keys. Without
releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding the and ↓ keys
down.
4. When you see “TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT” on the LCD,
release the and ↓ keys.
5. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD
before proceeding. This can take up to 30 seconds to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
6. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive.
7. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer.
227
Chapter
3
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
Figure 7. Navigating to the Appropriate Emulation File on the CD
8. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the appropriate file on the CD (using
the Unzipped directory) based on the printer model number and desired
emulation, e.g., UnzippedT5000IGP. (See Figure 7.)
IMPORTANT
You must use the Unzipped directory, since this contains the
uncompressed files necessary for NIC download.
9. Make note of the file name, which is a six digit number plus .prg,
e.g., 123456.prg.
This is the file you will download into the NIC.
10. Copy the file to the download directory.
11. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
12. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
13. Start the FTP protocol by typing:
ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Enter>
(where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP Address of the printer.)
14. Log in to the printer by typing:
root<Enter>
You are given a password prompt.
228
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory
NOTE: The default is no password. If the FTP program requires a password,
contact your system administrator.
15. At the password prompt, press <Enter>.
16. Once logged in, type the following sequence at the command prompt to
download the filename.prg file to the printer:
cd dest<Enter>
cd d1prn<Enter>
bin<Enter>
put filename.prg<Enter>
(where filename.prg is the file name you noted in step 9.)
CAUTION
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the controller
board and NIC card.
17. As the file downloads, the FTP program shows the progress as a
percentage. Once the download is complete, exit out of the FTP program
by typing:
quit<Enter>
18. When the new program has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (off).
19. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
20. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
21. Using the configuration printout(s), reconfigure the printer and reload any
optional font files.
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory
Optional font files are stored on a 3.5 inch floppy diskette that contains file
names comprised of a part number with a .dwn extension. You will insert the
diskette in your IBM-compatible computer and use either the parallel or serial
port to download the desired font file(s) to the printer’s flash memory.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off).
2. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS or
MS-DOS operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the
LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you
use this port, as described in the notes after step 15.
3. Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I/O port on the
printer and to the host computer.
4. Power on the computer and allow it to boot up.
5. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the and ↓ keys while
powering the printer on. Continue holding the and ↓ keys down.
6. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD,
release the and ↓ keys.
229
Chapter
3
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
NOTE: The printer default port is CENTRONICS; if you want to use this port,
continue to step 15.
7. Press the + key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT = CENTRONICS”
appears on the LCD.
8. Press the + key again to cycle through the download ports available in the
printer:
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 115000 baud)
DEBUG
9. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,
press ↵. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT” = <your selection> appears on
the display.
10. Insert the optional font diskette into diskette drive A (or B) of the
computer.
11. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
12. Make the diskette drive the active drive by typing:
A:<Enter> (if the diskette is in drive B, type B:<Enter>)
13. List the contents of the diskette at the command prompt by typing the
following:
dir<Enter>
You will see a directory listing containing files with a .dwn extension,
e.g., 94021.dwn, 94022.dwn, 94023.dwn.
14. Make note of the file name with the .dwn extension of each file you want
to download to the printer.
NOTE: The numeric portion of the file name will match the numbers of the
font typefaces listed in Appendix E of the PGL and VGL
Programmer’s Reference Manuals and provide you with a description
and print sample of the typeface.
230
Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory
15. At the command prompt type:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is file name you noted in step 14.)
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, type
the following command:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT2<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 14.)
If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer, type
the following commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
copy /b filename.dwn COM1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 14.)
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of MS-DOS can
use. The baud rate information entered in the above commands must
match the selection you made in step 8.
You can download the optional font files one at a time by entering one file
name per the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy
command.
To download one file at a time, enter the following at the command
prompt:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
To download multiple files, enter the following at the command prompt,
for example:
copy /b filename1.dwn+filename2.dwn+...LPT1<Enter>
16. While the font file is copied into flash memory, the printer LCD informs
you of the load process and status. When the new file is successfully
loaded into memory, the printer will reset itself and go online.
17. To verify that the optional fonts have been downloaded:
a. Perform a configuration printout.
— OR —
b. Select PRINTER CONTROLView File List. The new file names
will appear with the same part number file name you downloaded, but
with an .sf extension.
NOTE: The optional font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control
panel. They can only be selected via a software command from the
host.
18. Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online and return the printer to
normal operation.
231
Chapter
3
Downloading Emulation And Operating System Software
Downloading True Type Fonts
There are several ways to download TrueType fonts to your Thermaline
printer.
Printronix Windows Driver
Load the Printronix Windows driver (provided with your printer on the
Manuals and Utilities CD). Follow the instructions within the driver to
download and access TrueType fonts.
Font Download Utility
The Manuals and Utilities CD that comes with your printer also contains a
stand alone Font Download Utility which from a Windows-based system will
allow you to download the fonts. A parallel I/O connection is assumed.
Create and Send Download File - Online (PGL only)
A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable form by appending a
header to the file as described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual,
Font Load command. After conversion, the file can be copied to the
appropriate I/O port of the printer while it is online, just like any other print file
(for example: copy/b filename.ext lpt1).
Create and Send Download File - Download Mode
Create a download file as described above. Power up the printer as described
in the “Downloading Optional Font Files To Flash Memory” section. Substitute
the name of the file you just created for “FILENAME.DWN.”
Using Downloaded True Type Fonts
If downloaded from the Printronix Windows driver, TrueType fonts can be
accessed by any program using the driver as native fonts. Many WYSIWYG
bar code labelling application programs also provide the utility to download
and access TrueType fonts as printer resident (as opposed to bitmapped
images). Otherwise, use the FONT command as described in the PGL
Programmer’s Reference Manual to access the downloaded fonts.
232
4
Interfaces
Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time.
Auto Switching
This feature gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams
sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to
the serial, parallel, coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface
connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without
the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.
Standard Host Interfaces
•
•
•
Centronics parallel
IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional
High Speed Serial Port (RS-232/RS-422)
Optional Host Interfaces
•
•
Coax / Twinax
Ethernet 10/100Base-T
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel
interfaces.
233
Chapter
4
Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface
Table 9. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return
2
20
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
10
28
CHASSIS GROUND
17
DATA LINE 2
Return
3
21
ONLINE
Return
13
28
GROUND
30
DATA LINE 3
Return
4
22
FAULT
Return
32
29
Spares
14
DATA LINE 4
Return
5
23
PAPER EMPTY
Return
12
28
No Connection
34,35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return
6
24
BUSY
Return
11
29
+5 Volts
18
DATA LINE 6
Return
7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return
8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return
9
27
DATA STROBE
Return
1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
15
29
PRIME
Return
31
30
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
234
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Table 10. Centronix Parallel Interface Signals
Signals
Purpose
Data Lines 1 through 8
Provide eight standard or inverted levels from
the host that specify character data, plot data,
or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to
the extended ASCII character set. You may
enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8
parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu.
Data Strobe
Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from
the host that clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge
A low true pulse from the printer indicating the
character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is ready for data transfer and the PAUSE
key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may
accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE)
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy
A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer cannot receive data.
Prime
A high true level from the host to indicate the
printer should perform a warm start (printer is
reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI)
Carries a VFU signal from the host with the
same timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault
A low true level from the printer indicates a
printer fault.
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by
negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 9).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data
lines.
235
Chapter
4
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines.
(Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over
the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
Signals
Table 11 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on
the IEEE 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.
Table 11. IEEE 1284 Signals
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
1
Host
nStrobe
2
Host/Printer
Data 1 (LSB)
3
Host/Printer
Data 2
4
Host/Printer
Data 3
5
Host/Printer
Data 4
6
Host/Printer
Data 5
7
Host/Printer
Data 6
8
Host/Printer
Data 7
9
Host/Printer
Data 8 (MSB)
10
Printer
11
Printer
236
Nibble
Byte
HostClk
Host/Clk
nAck
PtrClk
PtrClk
Busy
PtrBusy
PtrBusy
Signals
Table 11. IEEE 1284 Signals (continued)
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
Nibble
Byte
12
Printer
PError
AckDataReq
AckDataReq
13
Printer
Select
Xflag
Xflag
14
Host
nAutoFd
Host Busy
HostAck
15
Not Defined
16
Logic Grid
17
Chassis Grid
18
Printer
Peripheral Logic High
19
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20
Signal Ground (Data 1)
21
Signal Ground (Data 2)
22
Signal Ground (Data 3)
23
Signal Ground (Data 4)
24
Signal Ground (Data 5)
25
Signal Ground (Data 6)
26
Signal Ground (Data 7)
27
Signal Ground (Data 8)
28
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31
Host
nInit
32
Printer
NFault
33
Not Defined
34
Not Defined
35
Not Defined
36
Host
nSelectIn
nDataAvail
aDataAvail
1284 Active
1284 Active
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
237
Chapter
4
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.
When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble Mode, signal is set
high. If Byte Mode, signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility Mode and
bidirectional in Byte Mode. They are not used in Nibble Mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
Mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is on-line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble Mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit —Resets init interface from the host.
Terminating Resistor Configurations
The factory equips the printer with terminating resistors that are used for
parallel interface configurations suitable for most applications. These 470
ohm pull-up and 1K ohm pull-down terminating resistors are located at RP2
and RP1 on the Controller PCBA.
If the values of these terminating resistors are not compatible with the
particular interface driver requirements of your host computer, you must call
your printer service representative to have this situation addressed.
238
RS-232
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
NOTE: The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are
compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications
EIA®-232-E and EIA-422-B.
The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit
serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial
data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud
rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
baud rates are available.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to
use RS-422 to prevent data loss. You may also need to increase the
Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte), to improve
performance.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422.
(A copper conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of
16 pF/foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be
used for the RS-422.
RS-232
Table 12. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Receive Data (RD)
3
Transmit Data (TD)
2
Chassis Ground
1
Clear To Send (CTS)
5
Request To Send (RTS)
4
Signal Ground
7
Data Set Ready (DSR)
6
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
20
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
8
Received Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Transmitted Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
239
Chapter
4
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
RS-422
Table 13. RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
- Receive Data (-RD)
15
- Transmit Data (-TD)
19
Chassis Ground
1
+ Receive Data (+RD)
17
+ Transmit Data (+TD)
25
Signal Ground
7
+RD, -RD—Serial data stream differentially received by printer.
+TD, -TD—Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and
control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
NOTE:
240
±RD and ±TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal.
5
Diagnostics And
Troubleshooting
Printer Self-Test
A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power-up. If any
faults are detected at that time, a fault will display (see page 256).
Printer operation should also be verified before setting the printer for online
operation. This is done by running the printer internal self-test diagnostic
program, which will produce a selection of printed test labels. For more
details, see page 202.
The Test Print program can be enabled from the printer through the TEST
PRINT key or from the DIAGNOSTICS menu and provides the capability for
printing a variety of test pattern labels.
NOTE: Before attempting to print test labels, the printer must be properly set
up for the type of media installed. (See the MEDIA CONTROL menu
selections on “Main Menu” on page 79).
Printing Test Labels
The printer has a built-in function that prints a selected number of test labels
or test patterns. The patterns are useful for isolating printer faults and
checking print quality. For an explanation of the different test patterns and
how they are used, see “Printer Tests” on page 201.
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Occasionally, situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill.
Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this section.
While not every conceivable situation is addressed here, you may find some
of these tips helpful. Contact a qualified service technician for problems that
persist or are not covered in this section.
241
Chapter
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Improving Processing Time
Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing
throughput, it may help to understand what happens during processing. When
the printer receives a format command, it enters the label formatting mode.
Label formatting requires time to process the label data into the printer
buffers.
The time required varies, depending on the complexity of the label format and
on the size of the area being printed. Once the data has been mapped into
memory, the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the
quantity command. In most cases, there is no delay between labels; however,
when using Automatic Label Peel-Off or Tear-Off media handling, the printer
stops between each label and waits for the label to be removed.
Data Exchange
Many things can cause data loss or communications problems. This section
suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause.
Handshaking
Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers (or a
computer and a peripheral input or output device) to indicate the status of the
data being transferred. In the serial mode, the printer uses both hardware and
software handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the
input buffer is full.
The printer can be used with either serial or parallel host interfaces. Parallel
interfaces are usually straightforward, with no special settings required. Serial
interfaces, however, have a variety of possible communication parameter
settings. The two methods of handshaking that can be used, hardware and
software, are explained below.
•
Hardware Handshaking
This electrical signal is controlled by the logic state on pin 20 of the serial
interface connector J2 (at the back of the printer). The signal will go high
when the printer is ready to receive data. The signal will go low when the
printer is in the busy state, which indicates that the printer input buffer is
full and can no longer receive data.
•
Software Handshaking
XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between
the printer and the host system. When the printer input buffer is full, the
printer transmits an XOFF (CTRL S) character that signals the host to
stop sending data. When memory space becomes available in the input
buffer, the printer sends an XON (CTRL Q) character, which tells the host
that the printer is ready to receive more data.
If the printer appears to have communication problems, the self-test
configuration test labels (see page 201) and character hex dump modes (see
page 202) should be checked. The tests can help identify printer configuration
errors that can cause problems.
242
Data Exchange
Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter. Configuration items
to check include the following:
•
Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct
information.
•
Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the
communication parameters match those of the host (i.e., baud rate,
parity, etc.).
•
Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the
printer.
Interfacing
The printer will not function properly with an incorrectly wired cable or the
wrong interface cable installed. If the cable is suspect, contact Printronix or
your authorized service representative.
When the printer is first powered up, it will reset itself to the communication
default parameters. The parameters are listed in the following table:
PARAMETER
DEFAULT VALUE
Baud
9600
Data Bits
8
Parity
NONE
Stop Bits
1
The printer interface configuration settings may be entered from the control
panel. See Chapter 3, “Configuring The Printer” for complete instructions.
243
Chapter
5
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Controlling Print Quality
Three factors have the greatest effect on print quality:
•
•
•
The amount of heat applied by the printhead (print intensity)
The speed at which media is moving under the printhead (print speed)
The amount of printhead pressure.
For example, low-cost direct thermal media often have very high reaction
temperatures, which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear
image. Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity for a
quality image.
The printer provides two ways to increase the heat:
•
Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the
MEDIA CONTROL menu.
•
Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function,
accessed via the host or through the MEDIA CONTROL menu. This
causes more heat to be transferred into the media, thereby generating a
darker image.
Proper printhead pressure adjustment will affect print quality. To adjust
pressure, rotate the printhead pressure adjustment dial (see Figure 8). For
more information, refer to “Printhead Pressure Adjustment” on page 59.
Also, the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign
material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat
transfer. If smears, voids or white lines appear in the printed form, the
printhead should be cleaned with a printhead cleaning pen (see Figure 8).
The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a
new ribbon (thermal transfer mode) or when you install new media (direct
thermal mode).
Pivoting Deck
Printhead
Pressure
Adjustment
Dial
Printhead
Elements
Deck Lock Lever
Figure 8. Cleaning the Printhead
244
Determining Printhead Wear
Determining Printhead Wear
When a printhead is worn, the most common sign of wear are fixed vertical
streaks that are always the same size and in the same place on the printout.
To determine if the cause of these vertical streaks is a worn printhead, follow
these methods.
1. Clean the printhead thoroughly with the printhead cleaning pen. Test
again for vertical streaks.
2. Remove the printhead (see page 245) and examine it for contamination
or damage such as scratches, dents, or other marks on the light brown
area containing the heating elements. Clean and install it, then test again
for vertical streaks.
3. Load an alternate roll of media. Test again for vertical streaks.
4. Load an alternate roll of ribbon. Test again for vertical streaks.
If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks, you must
replace the printhead.
Replacing The Printhead
Prepare The Printer
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off).
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source.
3. Remove the ribbon and print media.
245
Chapter
5
Replacing The Printhead
Replace The Printhead
CAUTION
Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area (heating
elements) of the printhead. Do not touch the light brown area when you
handle the printhead.
Pivoting
Deck
Printhead
Assembly
Deck Lock
Lever
Figure 9. Opening the Pivoting Deck
1. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise. The
pivoting deck will swing upward, exposing the bottom of the printhead
assembly.
CAUTION
To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components, ground
yourself by touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before
handling and installing the printhead.
2. Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the
printhead.
246
Replace The Printhead
Pivoting Deck
Printhead
Controller Cable
Assembly
Pull-Tab
Printhead
Retainer Clip (2)
Release
Tab
Printhead
Assembly
Power Supply
Cable Assembly
3. Behind the pivoting deck, gently pull the lower arms of the retainer clips
upward to release printhead. You only need to push the clips a small
amount to release the printhead.
4. Hold the printhead by the black powder coated aluminum cover as it
drops down.
5. Push the release tab down and pull the power supply cable out of the
printhead assembly.
6. Use the pull-tab to disconnect the printhead/controller cable from the
printhead assembly.
7. Unwrap the new printhead.
8. Position the new printhead below the pivoting deck and install the power
supply and printhead/controller cable assemblies to the printhead
assembly.
9. Slide the printhead upward into the pivoting deck until the retainer clips
catch it and it snaps into place. You can pull the printhead retainer clips
up slightly to help engage the printhead.
247
Chapter
5
Replacing The Printhead
Restore The Printer To Operation
1. Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints.
If necessary, gently clean the light brown area with a soft, lint-free cloth or
a cotton swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol or a Cleaning Pen.
2. Install the ribbon and print media.
3. Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise. (See Figure 9.)
4. Close the media cover.
5. Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source.
6. Set the printer power switch to | (on).
7. Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the
Diagnostics → Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns.
(Refer to page 201.)
248
Restore The Printer To Operation
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions
Symptom
Communications Failures.
Solution/Explanation
1. Check the interface cable.
2. Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is
enabled.
3. Verify the printer is receiving data by viewing the Job In
Process indicator on the control panel.
CONTROL PANEL
LCD message display is
illuminated and the printer
appears to be working, but
nothing is printing.
1. Verify that the labels are the correct type (direct or thermal
transfer).
2. Check that the media is loaded with the direct thermal side
facing up.
3. Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed. Route
transfer ribbon with ink side out.
4. Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by
pressing down on both sides of the pivoting deck. Make
sure the latches on each side of the pivoting deck are
locked.
5. Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible;
incompatibility can cause extremely light printing. Match
the ribbon to the type of media being used.
6. Check that the Print Intensity is correct. Set the Print
Intensity in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or via the host
software.
7. Check that the Label Width parameter value does not
exceed the width of the media installed. Set the Label
Width in the MEDIA CONTROL menu.
8. Run the TEST PRINT Checkerboard test pattern.
9. Remove the printhead completely and re-install it ensuring
the cables are correctly seated.
ONLINE status indicator is
flashing.
1. Check the LCD for a specific fault message. Press the
PAUSE key, and if a fault message displays, refer to the
LCD Message Troubleshooting table on page 257.
2. Check for an Out-of-Media condition or missing labels in
the middle of a roll. Load the correct media.
3. Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed.
Load ribbon and label stock correctly.
249
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
Power Failures
Printer fails to turn on, the
display is not backlit, and the
fan is not running.
1. Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached
to the printer and to the AC power outlet.
2. Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the
correct power range. Locate the printer in an area that has
the correct power range.
3. Check the AC power cord. Replace a damaged AC power
cord or one that you suspect may be bad.
4. Call your authorized service representative.
PRINT QUALITY
•
Label(s) did not get
printed within a multi label
print job.
1. If the serial interface is being used, verify that the correct
data protocol is selected to match the host interface
protocol.
•
A portion of the printed
image was clipped off
and the beginning of the
next label was printed on
the same physical label.
2. If Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu, the
printer may have falsely detected a gap, hole, or black
mark and then clipped (discarded) the remaining printable
data for the label. To fix this:
a. Perform Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate”
on page 63.
b. Decrease Gap Threshold value by 2 or 3 increments.
See “Gap/Mark Thresh” on page 110.
c.
Media moves, but no image
prints in ONLINE mode.
Set Clip Page to Disable. Set Label Length to correct
physical length value. See “Clip Page” on page 106.
1. Make sure the J402 power supply cable has a good
connection to the right side of the printhead.
2. Place the printer offline and print the Checkerboard
diagnostic test pattern (see page 201). If the pattern prints,
there is a communication problem between the host
computer and the printer.
Media moves, but no image
prints in Direct Thermal
mode.
250
1. Media is not the type for direct thermal printing. Install
direct thermal media.
2. Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up. Reinstall
the media with the correct side facing the printhead.
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Media and ribbon move, but
no image prints in Thermal
Transfer mode.
Solution/Explanation
1. Print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern and check
that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon. If the
image is on the ribbon, the ribbon may be installed with the
transfer side against the printhead, instead of against the
media.
2. The ribbon may be designed for another model printer.
3. The ribbon may not be compatible with the media.
When narrow media is
installed, the media moves
but no image prints.
Verify the Label Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu
agrees with the width of the installed media. Too large a value
will start the image too far to the right and off the media.
Printing is faded or of poor
quality.
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Check that both latches on the pivoting deck are closed
and latched. Close the printhead by pressing down on
both sides of the pivoting deck and rotating the deck lock
lever fully counterclockwise.
3. Verify that the head pressure adjustment dial is properly
set. Try increasing the pressure.
4. Verify that the Print Speed and Print Intensity values are
correct. Adjust Print Speed and Print Intensity in the
MEDIA CONTROL menu or via host software.
Print is light on the left or right
side of the label.
Check if the pressure blocks are set for the width of the media
being used. Set each block near the edge of the media.
Prints strange characters
instead of the correct label
format.
1. If the printer serial interface is being used, check that the
printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of
the host computer. Reset the printer via software, or turn
the printer off and then on.
2. Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data
bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits (or
vice-versa). Check the current setting by viewing it on the
LCD, and use the SERIAL PORT menu to adjust the
settings, if necessary.
3. If the printer parallel interface is being used, make sure the
parallel interface terminating resistors are correct for the
host computer drivers.
251
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
•
•
Start of image is printed
an erroneous distance
from the top-of-form.
The printer starts to print
one label and then
another, all within the
same physical label.
•
Loss of one or more
serialized labels within a
print job.
•
Start of image is printed
in the middle of the gap.
•
The top part of the image
is lost when printing with
Head First orientation
selected.
252
Solution/Explanation
1. In the MEDIA CONTROL menu, set Clip Page to Disable.
2. Make sure the Label Length value matches the actual
physical length of the label installed.
These symptoms could be caused by:
•
•
severely curled labels near the end of a media roll
•
multiple gaps within the physical label.
the media sensor triggering off of a dark, preprinted image
on the label
1. Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the
media installed. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
The likely cause of these symptoms is that Clip Page = Enable
and a cross-perforation, radical fold or flaw in the liner has
caused the media sensor to detect this as the leading edge
(TOF) of the new label or end of label (EOF), or both.
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Smears or voids in printed
image.
Solution/Explanation
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Make sure the printhead temperature (Print Intensity) is
not too high. Change the Print Intensity value in the
MEDIA CONTROL menu. (See “Print Intensity” on
page 96.)
3. Verify that the printhead pressure blocks are positioned
correctly to match the media width installed. (See
“Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments” on page 60.)
4. Make sure the printhead pressure dial is set properly for
the media thickness installed.
5. Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock, causing
fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer. Wipe label stock
with a cloth, or remove a few feet of labels to expose a
clean area. Handle labels by the edges.
6. Check that the media has not been mishandled before or
during installation in the printer. Soiled media or media
with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer.
7. Check that media has not been installed inside out.
Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce
big differences in print quality.
8. Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are
being used. Use the correct ribbon type.
9. Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface.
Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases.
10. Reduce the Print Speed value through the MEDIA
CONTROL menu or via host software.
11. If using ribbon (Transfer Print mode), do not use direct
thermal media.
253
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
PRINTER OPERATION
Advances several labels
when FEED key is pressed.
1. Check that labels are loaded correctly. (See “Loading
Media And Ribbon” on page 34.)
2. Check that the Page Length (selected under the MEDIA
CONTROL menu or sent by the host computer) agrees
with the length of the media installed. Although gaps,
holes, notches, or black marks are used to establish the
Top-of-Form position, a larger page length will override the
gap and skip a page or more if Clip Page (in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu) is set to Disable. Set Page Length to
match the media being used.
3. Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of
media installed. Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and
black mark media. (See “Running Auto Calibrate” on
page 63.)
4. Adjust the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps, holes,
notches, or narrow width black marks. (See “Positioning
The Media Sensor” on page 61.)
5. If the problem persists, run the Media Profile printout to
see if the label length indicators are being sensed.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See “Running Manual Calibrate”
on page 66.)
Pivoting deck is difficult to
close and lock when heavy
tag stock media is installed.
1. Set the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the MIN
position.
2. Close the pivoting deck and lock the deck lock lever.
3. Position the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the
desired head pressure setting.
Print is too small or too large.
Ensure the proper printhead is installed (203 or 300 dpi).
•
Print quality is good, but
the printer skips every
other label.
•
An occasional blank label
occurs within a print job,
but no labels are lost.
1. Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the
top edge of the form. Leave white space equal to eight dot
rows at the top of the label. 300 dpi = .0264 inches.
203 dpi = .04 inches.
254
2. Check that Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL
menu. Clip Page = Enable causes any printable data to be
clipped off and lost once the next TOF position
(transmissive gap, notch, hole, or reflective mark) is
detected. Clip Page = Disable allows the printer to ignore a
gap or mark. The printer looks for the gap or mark after the
specified Label Length is first reached.
Restore The Printer To Operation
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom
Solution/Explanation
RIBBON
Printer advances media, but
the ribbon does not advance.
1. Make sure the ribbon is installed correctly.
2. A poor ribbon/media combination can cause insufficient
friction between the media and ribbon. Verify that the
correct ribbon and media are being used.
3. The printhead pressure may not be set high enough. Set
the pressure higher.
4. There may be adhesive on the printhead. Clean the
printhead.
5. Verify that Print Mode in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is
set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printer cuts (melts) through
the transfer ribbon.
1. Verify that the printing heat setting (Print Intensity) is set to
the proper level. In the MEDIA CONTROL menu, set Print
Intensity to the correct level.
2. Verify that Print Mode in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is
set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printing stops and the
ONLINE status indicator
flashes.
1. Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged.
2. Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the
top of the next label is at least 0.100 inch. Use only labels
and tag stock approved for this printer.
3. Inspect for a jammed label. Remove the jammed label.
4. Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed
correctly.
Narrow width ribbon breaks
frequently.
The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set
too large, which causes too great a ribbon take-up and ribbon
supply spindle torque. Reduce the Ribbon Width value to
decrease the torque on the ribbon spindles. The Ribbon Width
value should be very close to the Label Width value.
To reduce the torque further, set Ribbon Length (in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu) from Save As Paper to Set In Menu. Then
set a value less than the installed ribbon width.
Wide width ribbon does not
take up properly. The ribbon
moves past the platen
assembly.
The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set
too narrow for the ribbon installed. Set the Ribbon Width value
to match the width of the ribbon installed. This will increase the
torque on the ribbon take-up spindle.
255
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Printer Alarms
The printer has built in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock
conditions. Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the
printer and media stock levels. The alarms also indicate if the printer
electronics detects an error condition.
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 15.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
•
Operator correctable
Field service required
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action
under the solution section of the table. After correcting the displayed fault,
press the PAUSE key to clear the error message and status indicator and
resume printing. If the fault message reappears, power off the printer and wait
15 seconds before powering on the printer again. If the error condition
persists, contact your authorized service representative.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You should try two steps to clear the fault before calling your
authorized service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the PAUSE key. If the message goes
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the
message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
256
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
BAD VFU CHANNEL
Yes
The user tried to use an
undefined VFU channel.
Use defined channels.
BAR CODE IMPROPER
Data Format
Yes
Data validation error:
improper data format.
Fix application so it sends data in the
correct bar code format.
BAR CODE QUIET
Zone too small
Yes
Data validation error:
Quiet Zone error.
1. Fix application.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Yes
Host sent data after the
printer buffer was full (serial
interface).
1. Make a configuration printout.
Explanation
Solution
2. Disable Quiet Zone Error reports.
2. Verify that the printer matches the
host serial interface configuration
settings for Data Protocol, Baud
Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity,
Data Terminal Ready, and Request
to Send.
3. Set printer serial interface
parameters to match those of the
host.
BUFFER OVERRUN
Yes
Receive overrun (serial
interface).
1. Make a configuration printout.
2. Verify that the printer matches the
host serial interface configuration
settings for Data Protocol, Baud
Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity,
Data Terminal Ready, and Request
to Send.
3. Set the printer serial interface
parameter to match those of the
host.
CALIBRATION
Warning
Yes
Data validation warning:
needs calibration.
Calibrate the validator.
CALIBRATION FAIL
See Manual
Yes
Calibration values derived
from Manual Calibrate were
not acceptable.
Run Manual Calibrate again.
CANNOT CALIBRATE
Disable Peel-Off
Yes
Run Calibrate was attempted
when Peel-Off was selected
for Media Handling (under
MEDIA CONTROL).
1. Select another Media Handling
option via the MEDIA CONTROL
menu, and install media without use
of the rewind option.
2. Enable Cal in Peel Mode in
CALIBRATE CTRL menu.
3. Retry Run Calibrate.
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
Yes
Emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The old
program is now being
deleted from flash memory.
No action required.
257
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
CONTRAST TOO LOW
Check media
Yes
CUTTER FAULT
Jam or Cut Fail
Yes
Explanation
Solution
Data validation error:
symbol contrast.
1. Adjust heat or change media.
1. Cutter assembly is not in
the closed position.
1. Place the cutter assembly in the
closed (up) position.
2. Cutter option was not able
to complete a full cut
cycle due to a jam.
2. Clear obstruction from the cutter
assembly.
3. Cutter PCBA detected
current overload and
opened circuit breaker on
cutter PCBA.
2. Disable symbol contrast error
reports.
3. Insure media thickness is within
specification.
Wait a few minutes for the cutter
circuit breaker to automatically
reset.
Press PAUSE to clear the fault
message and resume printing.
DIAGNOSTICS
PASSED
Yes
The printer passed its
memory and hardware
initialization tests.
No action required.
DO NOT POWER OFF
No
This is a standard warning
message that displays while
the printer is downloading
software.
Do not power off the printer until
downloading is complete.
Yes
Ethernet is initializing.
No action required.
Yes
Ethernet has finished
initializing.
No action required.
Yes
Ethernet interface is being
reset.
No action required.
EC SOFTWARE FAIL
See Manual
Yes/No
Engine control software
failure.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes/No
The printer cannot find the
data controller program or
the validation checksum is
corrupt.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: DRAM AT
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX
Yes/No
The printer found a defective
memory location.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM
Yes/No
The printer encountered an
error trying to program flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
E-NET INIT
E-NET READY
E-NET RESET
258
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ERROR: IPDS needs
300 DPI Head
Yes
The printer has detected a
203 DPI printhead installed
with IPDS software
downloaded. IPDS software
only supports the 300 DPI
printhead.
Power off the printer and replace the
203 DPI printhead with a 300 DPI
printhead.
ERROR: NO DRAM
DETECTED
Yes/No
The printer could not find any
DRAM.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM
Yes/No
The printer requires more
DRAM memory in order to
run the downloaded
program.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE FLASH
Yes/No
The printer requires more
flash memory in order to run
the downloaded program.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes
The printer is not compatible
with the downloaded
program.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes
The printer does not see a
program in flash memory.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: SECURITY PAL
NOT DETECTED
Yes/No
The security PAL is not
present or has failed.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX
Yes/No
Hardware failure in DRAM or
Main PCBA controller
circuitry.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH
Yes/No
Hardware or software fault in
flash memory.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
Yes/No
The printer received the
complete program but the
checksum did not match.
The data may have been
corrupted during download.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
259
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ERROR OCCURRED
FLUSHING QUEUES
Yes
An interim message displays
while the printer discards
host data it cannot use
because a fault condition
exists. While this message
displays, the asterisk (*)
rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*) stops
rotating, a different fault message will
appear; troubleshoot the final
message.
FILE EXISTS
Enable Overwrite
Yes
The printer operator tried to
save a file using the name of
an existing stored file.
Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu
and enable the Overwrite Files feature
to overwrite the existing file.
FILE SYS FULL
Add Flash
Yes/No
Insufficient flash memory
available to store file.
Install a larger flash memory SIMM.
For additional flash, contact your
authorized service representative.
FILE SYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes
Insufficient flash memory
available to store file.
Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu.
Use Delete Files to delete unwanted
files.
FILE SYS FULL
Optimize & Reboot
Yes
Insufficient flash memory
available to store file.
Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu
and use the Optimize & Reboot
feature.
FILE SYS INVALID
Optimize&Reboot
Yes/No
File system not detected or
flash was corrupted.
Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu
and use the Optimize & Reboot
feature.
FILE SYS WRITE
Check Flash
Yes/No
Problem writing to flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
FRAMING ERROR
Yes
Serial framing error over a
serial interface.
Match the serial interface settings of
the printer to those of the host
computer.
GAP NOT DETECTED
See Manual
Yes
The printer is set for Gap or
Mark sensing, but a gap,
notch, or black mark is not
being detected.
1. Check that the setting of the
Gap/Mark Sensor in the
CALIBRATE CTRL menu matches
the installed media.
The media sensor is not
positioned correctly.
2. Check the position of the media
sensor. (See “Positioning The
Media Sensor” on page 61.)
Gap/Mark Threshold is set
too high or Paper Out
Threshold is set too low.
3. Clean the sensor assembly and
paper path.
4. Run Auto Calibrate to improve the
sensor’s ability to detect the media
in use.
5. Run the Media Profile printout in the
CALIBRATE CTRL menu.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See
“Running Manual Calibrate” on
page 66.)
7. Manually change the Gap/Mark
Threshold and/or Paper Out
Threshold values.
260
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
GRF CHK ERROR
PRESS PAUSE
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
Yes
In the CT emulation over a
twinax interface, the printer
received a non-printable
character.
Press the PAUSE key twice.
Yes
The printhead is approaching
a hot state.
1. Allow the printer to continue
printing. Full speed will resume
automatically when a lower head
temperature is achieved.
Half Speed Mode
2. Let the printer cool down. Full
speed will be restored when printing
is resumed.
HEAD POWER FAIL
Yes/No
Printhead lost power.
1. Replace the printhead.
2. Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back on again.
If the problem persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
IGP/PGL ERROR
Yes
Appears when the "Fault"
option is selected from Error
Report in the front panel.
Deselect "Fault" from Error Report on
the front control panel.
INSUFFICIENT RAM
Reboot/Add RAM
Yes/No
Not enough RAM memory
available for a printer
function.
1. Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back on again.
2. To add more RAM memory to your
printer, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
Yes
The new emulation program
is loading into printer RAM.
XX% indicates how much of
the program has loaded.
No action required.
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Yes
A program is getting loaded
into flash.
No action required.
MENU MODE
VALIDATOR
Yes
This is the normal message
that displays when you first
press the MENU key to place
the printer in Menu mode.
No action required.
261
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
NON VOLATILE MEMORY
FAILED
OPTION NOT
INSTALLED
PAPER OUT
Load Paper
262
Can User
Correct?
Yes/No
Yes
Yes
Explanation
Solution
The printer assigns a certain
amount of simulated NVRAM
for storage of saved
configurations. Large
emulations reduce the
amount of space available
for saving configurations,
which means that sometimes
fewer than eight
configurations can be saved.
If this message appears
when saving a configuration,
it means the printer is out of
memory. Previously saved
configurations will still be
available, but the one that
was “saved” when the
message appeared is not in
memory. If this message
appears at power-up, it
means the flash memory is
defective.
1. If the message appears at powerup, call your authorized customer
service representative.
If the printer is powered on
with the cutter enabled in the
Media Handling menu, but
the cutter itself is open (in the
down position), the printer
cannot detect the cutter.
When using the cutter, the
printer must be powered on
with the cutter in the up
position.
1. Check that the cutter option is
installed, connected, and in the up
position before powering on the
printer.
The printer does not sense
media:
1. Install media. If a break occurred,
reinstall the media. Press the
PAUSE key to clear the fault
message. Check the media
installation procedures on page 34.
•
Media was not installed
or has run out.
•
A break in media has
occurred.
•
Media was not routed or
installed correctly.
•
The media sensor is not
positioned correctly.
•
Media is installed
correctly, but the sensor
is not detecting it.
•
Gap/Mark Threshold
value may be set too
high and/or Paper Out
Threshold may be set
too low.
2. If the message appears while
saving a configuration, the printer is
out of memory and will not save that
or subsequent configurations.
(Previously saved configurations
are still okay.)
3. Limit the number of saved
configurations to seven.
2. Install the cutter option or change to
the correct Media Handling option in
the MEDIA CONTROL menu.
3. If the error persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
2. Verify the media sensor is properly
positioned under the media. If the
media is installed correctly, the
media sensor may not be detecting
it. Run Auto Calibrate to improve
the ability of the sensor to detect the
installed media.
3. Check if the Gap/Mark Threshold is
too high or the Paper Out Threshold
is too low. Lower the Gap/Mark
Threshold or raise the Paper Out
Threshold value.
4. If using media with no gaps or black
marks, perform Auto Calibrate to
establish a valid Paper Out
Threshold.
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
PAPER OUT
TIMEOUT
Yes
In the CT emulation with a
coax interface, a time-out
message is sent to the host if
paper is not loaded within 10
minutes after PAUSE was
pressed to clear a paper out
fault.
Load media and run a print test. If the
message persists, contact your
authorized service representative.
PARITY ERROR
Yes
Parity error (serial interface).
Check your serial host interface
parameter settings. If necessary,
change them so they match the
settings of the attached host.
POOR SCANNING
Check Head&Heat
Yes
Data validation failure:
The ratio between bar code
elements is too small.
Adjust heat/speed/pressure.
POOR SCANNING
Check media
Yes
Data validation failure:
The bar code is only good in
small bands that are difficult
to scan.
Check for ribbon wrinkle. Roll wrinkled
area onto take-up spindle.
POOR SCANNING
Inspect head
Yes/No
Data validation failure:
Defects failure; blemishes
with the bar code are
detected.
1. Check paper and ribbon to make
sure they are clean, unwrinkled,
and installed properly.
2. Clean printhead.
3. If message persists, replace the
printhead.
POWER SAVER MODE
Yes
This is a status message.
The printer is in low-energy
idle state, the fan and higher
voltages are off, and only
+5Vdc logic circuits are
active.
No action required.
PRINT HEAD COLD
See Manual
Yes
Printer is in a cold
environment or connector
P401 has become dislodged.
1. Reseat P401.
2. Change the printhead.
3. Place printer in a warmer location.
4. If problem persists, contact your
authorized service representative.
PRINT HEAD HOT
See Manual
Yes/No
The printhead has become
overheated.
1. Allow the printhead to cool down for
5 minutes, then press PAUSE.
Resume printing.
2. If possible, reduce print intensity.
3. If problem persists, contact your
authorized service representative.
PRINT HEAD UP
Close Print Head
Yes
Printhead is not closed and
completely latched.
Close and latch the printhead pivoting
deck.
263
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
PRINTER HOT
See Manual
Can User
Correct?
Yes/No
Explanation
The printer has detected
higher than usual
temperatures on the
controller PCBA.
Solution
1. Determine that the fan is operating
and that all air vents are
unobstructed.
2. Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power the printer
back on.
3. Move the printer to a cooler
location.
4. If the problem persists after moving
the printer to a cooler location,
contact your authorized customer
service representative.
PRINTER UNDER
REMOTE CONTROL
Yes
Indicates that remote
management software has
control of the printer.
Press any key on the printer.
PWR SUPPLY HOT
See Manual
Yes
Power supply is hot.
1. Determine that the fan is operating
and that all air vents are
unobstructed.
2. Move the printer to a cooler area.
3. If the problem persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
RBN TAKEUP FULL
Remove Used Rbn
Yes
The ribbon takeup spool is
full.
1. Empty the takeup spool.
2. If the takeup spool is not full, try
re-threading the ribbon.
3. Disable Rbn Takeup Full in the
MEDIA CONTROL menu.
Yes
Remove Label
1. This is the normal
message when Peel-off or
Tear-off has been
selected for Media
Handling.
Label detected at front of
the printer by the Label
Taken Sensor.
2. The incorrect Media
Handling method is
selected.
1. Remove the label from the front of
the printer to allow the next label to
print.
2. Change the Media Handling
selection in the MEDIA CONTROL
menu to the correct option. Select
Tear-Off Strip or Continuous to
prevent the printer from stopping for
label removal after each label is
printed.
RESETTING
PLEASE WAIT
Yes
Printer finished loading the
program into flash memory
and is automatically resetting
itself.
No action required.
RESTORING
BOOT CODE
Yes
Normal download
initialization message.
No action required.
RIBBON BROKEN
Reload Ribbon
Yes
Ribbon is broken between
the ribbon take up spindle
and the printhead.
Reattach ribbon.
264
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
RIBBON DETECTED
In Direct Mode
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Solution
Printer senses ribbon
installed, but Print Mode is
set for direct thermal printing
(printing where no ribbon is
required).
1. Remove the ribbon from the printer
if direct thermal media is being
used.
In the CT emulation with a
coax interface, the ribbon
has not moved for 10
minutes after PAUSE was
pressed to clear a ribbon
fault.
1. Clean the printer.
2. Change the Print Mode from Direct
to Transfer if thermal transfer
printing is being used.
RIBBON FAULT
Timeout
Yes
RIBBON LOAD BAD
Reload Ribbon
Yes
Ribbon was incorrectly
loaded on the take-up or
supply spindle.
1. Reload the ribbon correctly. For
ribbon loading instructions, see
page 45.
Yes
1. The supply spool is
getting low.
1. Replace ribbon, and if further
adjustments are necessary, change
the Ribbon Low value (in the
MEDIA CONTROL menu) to a
lower value.
Ribbon Low
2. If there is a large amount
of ribbon still on the
supply spool, then the
Ribbon Low message is
being displayed falsely.
RIBBON OUT
Load Ribbon
Yes
1. The ribbon supply spool is
empty.
2. Power off, wait 15 seconds, then
power back on again. If the
message persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
2. Disable Ribbon Low in the MEDIA
CONTROL menu.
1. Replace ribbon.
2. Reinstall ribbon.
2. The ribbon has broken.
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION
Yes
SIGNAL
Clipping
Yes/No
SOFTWARE ERROR*
Recycle Power
Yes/No
The software being used is
not correct for the printer.
1. Load the correct software.
Data validation error: The
validator cannot read clearly
because either the ambient
light is too bright or there is a
hardware failure inside the
validator itself.
1. Dim ambient lighting.
1. Application software tried
to perform an illegal
printer function.
1. Recycle the printer power. If
possible, print a job that has
previously worked.
2. There are damaged logic
circuits on the controller
PCBA.
2. If the problem persists, contact your
authorized service representative.
2. Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back on again.
If the problem persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
2. Replace the validator.
265
Chapter
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
Speed Exceeds
Validator Limit
Yes
The Print Speed or Slew
Speed value is above 6 IPS
as the power-up default with
the validator option installed,
or the user attempted to
increase Print Speed or Slew
Speed above 6 IPS.
Change the Print Speed or Slew Speed
value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu
to 6 IPS or less when using the
validator option, and save the new
value as the power-up default.
TESTING HARDWARE
PLEASE WAIT
Yes
Normal power-up message.
Printer is running its
initialization routine.
1. No action required.
Unscannable Code
Check media
Yes
Data validation error:
missing barcode.
Check the paper and ribbon for
cleanliness, wrinkles, etc., or an
obstructed validator beam. If there is
no validator beam at all, or if the LED is
not flashing as barcodes pass through
the validator beam, recycle validator
power. If the problem persists, contact
your service representative.
06 HOST REQUEST
Yes
Status message: in CT
emulation, the host computer
or printer controller requires
attention.
Not a printer problem.
08 HOLD PRINT
TIMEOUT
Yes
Status message: in CT
emulation, the printer was
offline more than 10 minutes
and the “Intervention
Required” parameter is set to
“Send to Host.”
Press PAUSE to put the printer online.
Yes/No
Communication Check: a
message that appears in the
CT emulation meaning the
line is not active on a twinax
interface.
1. Check your network for proper
operation.
Yes
Invalid Address: poll time-out
on the twinax interface
indicating the unit address is
not recognized by printer.
Have the system administrator make
sure the printer address is correct.
Yes
Controller Unit Timed Out:
the printer was not enabled
for one minute or more on a
coax interface.
Check the cable connection and host
system. (Refer to the line problem
determination procedures, as
recommended by the host system.)
15 COMM CHECK
22 INVALID ADDR
27 CU TIMED OUT
266
2. If the printer does not complete
initialization and continues
displaying this message when the
CT emulation is installed, the
expansion CT board may not be
connected to the controller PCBA.
2. Try a different cable from a known
good device.
3. If the problem persists, contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
Fault Messages
Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting (continued)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
28 CU NOT ENAB
Yes
Controller Unit Not Enabled.
Poll time-out-error. The
printer was not polled for one
minute across a coax
interface.
Check the cable connection and host
system. (Refer to the line problem
determination procedures, as
recommended by the host system.)
33 HEAD OPEN
TIMEOUT
Yes
Status message in the CT
emulation: The printer was
offline more than 10 minutes,
and the "Intervention
Required" parameter is set to
"Send to Host."
Close and latch the printhead. Press
PAUSE to put the printer online.
40V POWER FAIL
Yes
+40 VDC: an internal power
failure.
Power off the printer for 15 seconds,
then power back on. If the problem
persists, contact your authorized
customer service representative.
203 DPI Head Installed
Yes
Normal power-up message.
The printer is running its
initialization routine and
indicating DPI resolution of
the installed printhead.
No action required.
300 DPI Head Installed
Yes
Normal power-up message.
The printer is running its
initialization routine and
indicating DPI resolution of
the installed printhead.
No action required.
Explanation
Solution
267
Chapter
268
5
Solving Other Printer Problems
A
Specifications
Print Method
Table 16. Printing Specifications
T5204
T5304
T5206
T5306
T5208
T5308
Print Resolution (dpi)
203
300
203
300
203
300
Min. Dot Size (sq. in)
.005
.0033
.005
.0033
.005
.0033
(.127 mm)
(.083 mm)
(.127 mm)
(.083 mm)
(.127 mm)
(.083 mm)
Bar Code Modulus (mils)
Picket Fence
Ladder
5 - 127
10 -127
3.3 - 110
10 - 110
5 - 127
10 - 127
3.3 - 110
10 - 110
5 - 127
10 - 127
3.3 - 110
10 - 110
Max. Print Speed (ips)
10
8
10
8
8
6
Max. Print Width (in.)
4.1
4.1
6.6
6.6
8.5
8.5
(104.1 mm)
(104.1 mm)
(167.6 mm)
(167.6 mm)
(215.9 mm)
(215.9 mm)
Flash Memory (MB) Standard
4
4
4
4
4
4
Flash Memory (MB) Maximum
10
10
10
10
10
10
DRAM (MB) Standard
8
8
8
8
8
8
DRAM (MB) Maximum
16
16
16
16
16
16
Max. Print Length (in.) at max.
47
21
99
62
99
48
(1194 mm)
(533 mm)
(2515 mm)
(1575 mm)
(2515 mm)
(1219 mm)
99
99
99
99
99
99
(2515 mm)
(2515 mm)
(2515 mm)
(2515 mm)
(2515 mm)
(2515 mm)
width, std. DRAM
(1,2)
Max. Print Length (in.) at max.
width, 16MB DRAM
(2)
NOTES:
1. These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation.
2. These values may not be supported at maximum throughput.
269
Appendix A
Media
Table 17. Media - General Information
Type:
Roll-fed, die-cut continuous or fanfold labels, tags or tickets;
most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials.
Supply Roll:
8 inch (203 mm) maximum diameter on 1.5 inch (37.5 mm) to 3
inch (76 mm) diameter cores.
Internal Rewinder:
Accepts up to a 5 inch diameter roll of label backing.
Label Material:
Thermal transfer plain-coated papers, vinyl, Mylar, metallized
paper, non-woven fabric, fine woven fabric, thermal-visible light
scannable paper, infrared scannable paper, thermal ticket/tag
stock, thermally sensitive plastic stock.
Media Sensing:
Horizontally moveable sensor assembly. When set to Gap, the
assembly detects die-cut labels on liner media and notches and
holes in tag stock. When set to Mark, it senses a black mark on
the underside of tag or label stock. When set to Disable, it
senses no label indicators or ignores all existing label length
indicators on the installed media.
Label Taken Sensor:
Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat. Used
only for Tear-Off and Peel-Off Media Handling modes.
Automatic Label Peel-Off:
Peels and presents label to the operator, one at a time.
Automatic Label Peel-Off is supported only when the internal
rewinder is installed. (The internal rewinder is a factory-installed
option.)
270
Media
I. Tag Specification
(Mark Sensing)
II. Tag Specification
(Gap Sensing)
III. Label Specification
(Gap Sensing)
Black Mark (on underside)
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
Direction of Media Motion
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
Direction of Media Motion
Direction of Media Motion
Figure 10. Media Dimensions
Table 18. Media Specifications
T5X04
T5X06
T5X08
A
Label Width Range
0.75 -4.5 in.
19.1-114.3 mm
2.0-6.8 in.
50.8-172.7 mm
3.0-8.75 in.
76.2-222.3 mm
B
Backing Width Range
0.75-4.5 in.
19.1-114.3 mm
2.0-6.8 in.
19.1-114.3 mm
3.0-8.75 in.
19.1-114.3 mm
C
Min. Gap/Hole/Notch Height
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
K
Min. Refl. Mark Height
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
0.10 in.
2.54 mm
I
Min Refl. Mark Width
0.5 in.
12.7 mm
0.5 in.
12.7 mm
0.5 in.
12.7 mm
E
Media Thickness Range
.0025-.01 in.
.0635-.254 mm
.0025-.01 in.
.0635-.254 mm
.0025-.01 in.
.0635-.254 mm
G
Width of Inter-label gap/hole
0.25-0.50 in.
6.35-12.7 mm
0.25-0.50 in.
6.35-12.7 mm
0.25-0.50 in.
6.35-12.7 mm
D
Media Length Range
Continuous/Batch Mode
0.25 in. (6.35mm) - 99 in. (2515mm)*
Tear-Off Strip Mode
0.25 in. (6.35mm) - 99 in. (2515mm)*
Tear-Off Mode
1 in. minimum (25.4 mm) - 99 in. (2515 mm)*
Peel-Off Mode
1 in. minimum (25.4 mm) - 99 in. (2515 mm)*(1)
Cut Mode
2 in. minimum (50.8 mm) - 99 in. (2515 mm)*
These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application.
* 99 in. requires DRAM upgrade.
(1)
1.5 inch with validator support.
271
Appendix A
Ribbon
Table 19. Ribbon Specifications
T5X04
T5X06
T5X08
Ribbon Width Range
0.75-4.5 in.
19 -114.3 mm
2.0-6.8 in.
50.8-172.7 mm
3.0-8.75 in.
76.2-222.25 mm
Max. Ribbon Length (m)
625
625
625
Indicators And Switches
Table 20. Indicators and Switches
Indicator Lights:
ONLINE, Job-In-Process
Switches:
POWER
Keys:
PAUSE, JOB SELECT/ - (Decrement), FEED/↑ (Up),
TEST PRINT,
..
.
↵ (Enter)
Message Display:
(Menu), (Cancel)/↓ (Down),
2-row 16-characters per row for error messages,
print status, and recalling stored formats
Memory
Table 21. Memory Specifications
272
Flash Memory (standard)
4MB SIMM installed on Controller PCBA
DRAM (standard)
8MB
Host Interfaces
Host Interfaces
Table 22. Host Interface Characteristics
1. Serial RS-232 or RS-422 at 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, or 115200 baud.
2. Parallel (Centronics compatible) or IEEE 1284 bi-directional.
The RS-232 and RS-422 host interfaces shall have the following
characteristics:
Character Set:
ANSI® ASCII character set
Word Length:
Selectable 7-bit or 8-bit data format
Handshaking:
XON/XOFF (in receive mode only) and
CTS/DTR
Input Buffer:
Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes. XOFF is
transmitted and DTR goes low when buffer is
equal to or less than 25% of full. XON is
transmitted and DTR goes high when buffer is
25% above empty. Characters are transmitted
with no parity from the printer
Power
Table 23. Power Source and Grounding
Power Source:
115 or 230 VAC 50/60Hz switching power
supply.
Grounding:
Unit must be connected to a properly
grounded receptacle.
Table 24. Power Consumption
4” printers
6” printers
8” printers
203 dpi
10 ips
300 dpi
8 ips
203 dpi
10 ips
300 dpi
8 ips
203 dpi
8 ips
300 dpi
6 ips
Energy Star
(Power Saver Mode)
24 Watts
24 Watts
24 Watts
24 Watts
24 Watts
24 Watts
Standby
50 Watts
50 Watts
50 Watts
50 Watts
50 Watts
50 Watts
25% Print Density
142 Watts
143 Watts
205 Watts
175 Watts
213 Watts
212 Watts
50% Print Density
234 Watts
235 Watts
360 Watts
300 Watts
375 Watts
373 Watts
273
Appendix A
Environmental
Table 25. Environmental Information
Operating Temperature:
41° F to 104° F (5° C to 40° C)
Storage Temperature:
-40° F to 150° F (-40° C to 60° C)
Operating Humidity:
Storage Humidity:
20% to 85%, non-condensing
5% to 85% non-condensing
Ventilation:
Free air movement
Dust:
Non-conducting, non-corrosive
Physical
Table 26. Physical Dimensions
T5X04
T5X06
T5X08
Outside Dimensions (in.)
13H x 11.7W x
20.5D
13H x 13.4W x
20.5D
13H x 15.4W x
20.5D
Max. Weight (lbs/kg)
39 lbs.
17.55 kg
45 lbs.
20.25 kg
48.5 lbs.
21.83 kg
Add 1.75" D with media guide installed
Add 7.5" D and 6" H for validator option
Add 1.4" D for media cutter option
Acoustic Specifications
Table 27. T5000 Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296
T5X04
T5X06
T5X08
Printing @ 6 IPS
68 dBA
62 dBA
62 dBA
Standby:
37 dBA
37 dBA
37 dBA
274
B
Printer Options
Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to provide a
large degree of application flexibility. A description of the option complement
is given below. For field-installable options, installation instructions are
provided with each option.
Hardware Options
Memory Expansion
The printer internal DRAM and Flash memories can be expanded to 16MB
and 10MB respectively using SIMM modules.
Media Cutter
The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed (for cutting tags
and labels), or the option can be installed by an authorized service
representative at a later date. Once installed, the printer can be configured to
automatically cut media after each label is printed or via the software
command to cut media after a specified number of labels is printed.
Media Cutter Tray
This option is used exclusively with the media cutter option to collect cut
labels or tag stock. This option is field installable by the operator.
Online Data Validator (ODV™)
This option provides the capability for verifying printed barcode quality during
the printing process.
The printer may be ordered with the Online Barcode Validator installed, or the
option can be field installed by an authorized service representative.
Internal Rewinder
The internal rewinder is a factory-installed option.
275
Appendix B
Hardware Options
Interface Options
Coax/Twinax Host Interface
The coax/twinax host interface option mounts inside the printer and functions
as a protocol converter to allow the direct connection of the printer to an IBM
host computer that uses either a coax or a twinax data interface. The printer
may be ordered with the Coax/Twinax option installed, or it can be field
installed by an authorized service representative.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
This option permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it
directly to a host system. It is mounted inside the printer. The printer may be
ordered with a NIC installed, or it can be field installed by an authorized
service representative. The parallel port is no longer accessible when the NIC
option is installed.
IPDS for Use with Twinax Host Interface
This option supports the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) language to
allow direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses the
Twinax data interface. The printer may be ordered with this option installed
and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an
authorized service representative at a later date. The printer must have a
Coax/Twinax interface, 300 DPI Printhead, and 16 MB DRAM installed to
support this field installed option.
IPDS for Use with a NIC
This option supports the IPDS language to allow a LAN connection. The
printer may be ordered with this option and the required hardware to support it
or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative. The printer
must have a NIC, 300 DPI Printhead, and 16 MB DRAM installed to support
this field installed option.
IPDS for Use with a NIC and Twinax Host Interface
This option supports the IPDS language to allow a LAN connection as well as
a direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses the
Twinax data interface. The printer may be ordered with this option installed
and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an
authorized service representative. The printer must have a NIC, Coax/Twinax
interface, 300 DPI printhead, and 16 MB DRAM installed to support this field
installed option.
276
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons
Supplies And Accessories
The best printing solution is achieved when the printer, ribbon, and media are
matched to the application requirements. The use of Genuine Printronix
Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality, consistent
bar code performance, and extended life of the printhead.
Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the
application suitability for all Media and Ribbon products. To obtain a copy of
this Guide, or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal
Supplies, please call:
Americas:
(800) 733-1900
Fax: (714) 368-2354
Europe, Middle East,
Africa:
(33) 1-46-25-1900
Fax: (33) 1-47-28-9993
Asia:
(65) 548-4116
Fax: (65) 546-1588
Or visit our website at www.printronix.com.
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons
The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons:
Printronix Wide Spectrum Wax Ribbon 8300
Provides superior print quality for coated and uncoated paper and tag stocks.
Printronix Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8500
Provides excellent high speed print quality with premium durability
performance on a wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films.
Printronix Flood-Coat Specialty Wax Resin Blend
Ribbon 8550
Designed for use on spot-coated and flood-coated labels. With this ribbon, the
need for protective varnishes on flood-coated labels is eliminated, which can
reduce the cost of labels.
Printronix Specialty Resin Ribbon 8600
A premium resin formula for excellent image and scuff resistance, while
achieving premium print quality on a wide range of synthetic films and coated
papers.
Printronix Care Label Specialty Resin Ribbon 8630
This ribbon is for applications requiring high heat resistance and wash
resistance.
277
Appendix B
Supplies And Accessories
Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 8700
Provides highest heat, chemical, and abrasion resistance for use with
high-end synthetic facestocks. When used with the proper polyester media,
meets UL/CSA regulatory requirements.
Printronix Gasoline Resistant Specialty Resin Ribbon 8725
Designed for high temperature and solvent resistance applications using
synthetic facestocks media such as polypropylene, polyethylene, and
polyester.
All ribbons are available in widths of: 2.36” (60mm), 3.15” (80mm), 4.33”
(110mm), 5.12" (130mm), 6.00" (152.4mm), 6.70" (171mm), and 8.67"
(220mm).
Genuine Printronix Media
Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes, colors, and shapes of labels and
tags readily available to meet all of your labelling needs. The Printronix
Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations
which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system
without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and
tooling of a special die to match your requirements.
Genuine Printronix ThermaLine Media
ThermaLine
Media Type
Description
Typical Applications
Media 110
Premium coated thermal transfer paper
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID, hardware parts supply
Media 120R
Premium coated thermal transfer paper
Removable adhesive
Temporary product ID, pricing, point of sale, shelf
marking labels which can be cleanly removed
Media 180T
7.0 mil coated thermal transfer paper
tagstock
Retail hangtag, warehouse bin and pouch inserts,
inventory control, work in process, general purpose tag
Media 210
Economy direct thermal paper
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Short life deli, grocery, shipping, work in process
Media 220
Premium direct thermal paper
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID
Media 270
Infra-Red scannable direct paper
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Infra-red scannability for overnight shipping and
grocery environments
Media 280T
7 mil direct thermal paper tagstock
Economical ticket and tag stock for general retail and
industrial use
Media 410
3.3 mil direct thermal film
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Excellent moisture resistance and tear strength for
applications such as baggage tags, etc.
Media 510
4.0 mil white thermal transfer polyolefin
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Durable satin finish for chemical pails and drums and
general outdoor and industrial use
278
Genuine Printronix Media
Genuine Printronix ThermaLine Media
ThermaLine
Media Type
Description
Typical Applications
Media 520
Smudge proof white thermal transfer
polyolefin
Permanent acrylic adhesive
Outdoor exposures especially chemical drums, etc.
provides a markable soundproof topcoat
Media 580T
8.5 mil smudge proof thermal transfer
Poly tagstock
Outdoor nursery, lumberyard, and industrial
environment hangtag and insert tag
Media 700s
2.0 mil polyester labelstock thermal transfer
White, bright & matte chrome
UL/CSA compliant nameplate labels, harsh
environment and laboratory labels
Besides the standard roll label configuration, Genuine Printronix ThermaLine
labels are also available in fanfold configurations.
Type
Media (Stock)
Ribbon
Features
Typical Applications
Direct Thermal
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Not Used
Low cost.
Ease of use.
Low environmental durability.
Limited label life.
Will fade and/or discolor when
exposed to heat, sunlight, or
chemicals.
Shipping.
Inventory Tracking.
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Printronix
Wide Spectrum
Wax
Lowest cost thermal transfer
combination.
Most commonly used.
Low environmental durability.
Low abrasion resistance.
Longer life than direct
thermal.
Shipping.
Inventory Tracking.
Product Labelling.
Compliance Labeling.
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Printronix Wax
Resin Blend
Mid-range wax resin
performance and
characteristics at economy
wax prices.
Darker, razor-sharp, smudgeproof images.
Same as economy
applications with
advantage of
supporting
Polypropylene,
Polyethylene,
Polyolefin, and Valeron
media.
Tyvek® and
Valeron®
Thermal Transfer
Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Printronix
Specialty Resin
Better environmental
durability.
Better abrasion resistance
than wax.
More expensive than wax.
Good aesthetic appearance.
Retail applications
where labels are
handled.
Excellent for most
applications.
Compliance Labelling.
Thermal Transfer
Synthetic Label
Printronix Harsh
Environment
Resin
High environmental durability.
High physical durability.
Excellent aesthetic
appearance.
Most expensive label/tag
combination.
High temperature
environments.
Medical applications.
Outdoor environments.
Environments with
chemicals.
Compliance labelling.
279
Appendix B
Supplies And Accessories
Accessories
Field installable accessories available for your thermal printer are listed
below. Contact your authorized supplier for more details.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
280
Media Cutter
Media Cutter Tray (used with a Media Cutter option)
Coax/Twinax Host Interface
Network Interface Card
Online Barcode Validator
Memory Expansion, DRAM and Flash
Maintenance Manual
LP+ Programmer’s Reference Manual
IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
IGP/VGL Programmer’s Reference Manual
C/T Programmer’s Reference Manual
Network Interface Card User’s Manual
Remote Management Software User’s Manual
C
Char
Dec
ASCII Control Codes
Hex
NUL
0
00
SOH
1
01
STX
2
EXT
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
32
20
@
64
40
`
96
60
!
33
21
A
65
41
a
97
61
02
+
34
22
B
66
42
b
98
62
3
03
#
35
23
C
67
43
c
99
63
EOT
4
04
$
36
24
D
68
44
d
100
64
ENQ
5
05
%
37
25
E
69
45
e
101
65
ACK
6
06
&
38
26
F
70
46
f
102
66
BEL
7
07
+
39
27
G
71
47
g
103
67
BS
8
08
(
40
28
H
72
48
h
104
68
HT
9
09
)
41
29
I
73
49
i
105
69
LF
10
0A
*
42
2A
J
74
4A
j
106
6A
VT
11
0B
+
43
2B
K
75
4B
k
107
6B
FF
12
0C
,
44
2C
L
76
4C
l
108
6C
CR
13
0D
-
45
2D
M
77
4D
m
109
6D
SO
14
0E
.
46
2E
N
78
4E
n
110
6E
SI
15
0F
/
47
2F
O
79
4F
o
111
6F
DLE
16
10
0
48
30
P
80
50
p
112
70
DC1
17
11
1
49
31
Q
81
51
q
113
71
DC2
18
12
2
50
32
R
82
52
r
114
72
DC3
19
13
3
51
33
S
83
53
s
115
73
DC4
20
14
4
52
34
T
84
54
t
116
74
NAK
21
15
5
53
35
U
85
55
u
117
75
SYN
22
16
6
54
36
V
86
56
v
118
76
ETB
23
17
7
55
37
W
87
57
w
119
77
CAN
24
18
8
56
38
X
88
58
x
120
78
EM
25
19
9
57
39
Y
89
59
y
121
79
SUB
26
1A
:
58
3A
Z
90
5A
z
122
7A
ESC
27
1B
;
59
3B
[
91
5B
{
123
7B
FS
28
1C
<
60
3C
\
92
5C
|
124
7C
GS
29
1D
=
61
3D
]
93
5D
}
125
7D
281
Appendix C
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
RS
30
1E
>
62
3E
^
94
5E
US
31
1F
?
63
3F
_
95
5F
Ç
128
80
á
160
A0
192
C0
ü
129
81
í
161
A1
193
é
130
82
ó
162
A2
â
131
83
ú
163
ä
132
84
ñ
à
133
85
å
134
ç
Char
Hex
126
7E
127
7F
+
224
E0
C1
_
225
E1
194
C2
+
226
E2
A3
195
C3
+
227
E3
164
A4
196
C4
_
228
E4
Ñ
165
A5
197
C5
+
229
E5
86
ª
166
A6
_
198
C6
230
E6
135
87
_
167
A7
+
199
C7
•
231
E7
ê
136
88
¿
168
A8
200
C8
_
232
E8
ë
137
89
«
169
A9
201
C9
+
233
E9
è
138
8A
170
AA
202
CA
_
234
EA
ï
139
8B
1/2
171
AB
203
CB
+
235
EB
î
140
8C
1/4
172
AC
204
CC
_
236
EC
ì
141
8D
¡
173
AD
205
CD
_
237
ED
Ä
142
8E
174
AE
206
CE
238
EE
Å
143
8F
175
AF
207
CF
239
EF
É
144
90
176
B0
_
208
D0
240
F0
æ
145
91
177
B1
+
209
D1
241
F1
Æ
146
92
@
178
B2
+
210
D2
242
F2
ô
147
93
#
179
B3
+
211
D3
243
F3
ö
148
94
180
B4
+
212
D4
244
F4
ò
149
95
+
181
B5
213
D5
245
F5
û
150
96
+
182
B6
–
214
D6
246
F6
ù
151
97
+
183
B7
+
215
D7
247
F7
ÿ
152
98
_
184
B8
+
216
D8
º
248
F8
Ö
153
99
1
185
B9
217
D9
¿
249
F9
Ü
154
9A
186
BA
218
DA
I
250
FA
°
155
9B
187
BB
219
DB
251
FB
£
156
9C
188
BC
220
DC
252
FC
+
157
9D
¢
189
BD
221
DD
253
FD
x
158
9E
¥
190
BE
222
DE
254
FE
_
159
9F
191
BF
223
DF
255
FF
»
+
~
Dec
_
3/4
_
NOTE: For the hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)
282
D
Standard And Heavy-Duty
Media Cutter Installation
Prepare The Printer
NOTE: Before you begin, please note that steps 1 through 3 below are
applicable for both the standard and heavy-duty media cutters. When
you get to step 4, you will directed to separate instructions specific to
the standard or heavy-duty cutter.
Peel/Tear
Assembly
Screw (2)
Lower Support Assembly
Peel/Tear Door
Figure 1. Peel/Tear Assembly
1. Set the printer power switch to O (OFF).
2. Open the peel/tear door by pulling it upward, then forward.
3. Using the appropriate metric hex key, remove the two screws attaching
the peel/tear assembly to the lower support assembly.
NOTE: Keep the two screws you have removed; you will use them to attach
the cutter assembly to the lower support assembly.
4. To install a standard cutter, go to “Installing The Standard Cutter” on
page 284. To install a heavy-duty cutter, go to “Installing The HeavyDuty Cutter” on page 286.
283
Appendix D
Prepare The Printer
Installing The Standard Cutter
RJ-11 Receptacle
RJ-11
Connector
Lower Support Assembly
Mounting Bracket
Screw (2)
Thumbscrew
(Not visible in this
view.)
Cutter Assembly
Figure 2. Standard Cutter Assembly
1. Loosen the knurled thumbscrew on the front of the cutter and swing open
the cutter assembly from the cutter assembly mounting bracket.
2. Place the cutter assembly in position.
3. Install the two screws using the appropriate metric hex key.
4. Plug the RJ-11 connector into the RJ-11 receptacle.
5. Place the cutter assembly into the up (closed) position and secure it by
tightening the knurled thumbscrew.
Restore The Printer To Operation
1. Set the printer power switch to | (ON).
2. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu Mode.
3. Press the ↓ and ↵ keys at the same time until “ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED” appears on the printer display.
284
Restore The Printer To Operation
4. Press
..
.
until “PRINTER CONTROL” displays.
5. Press ↑ until “Advanced User” displays.
6. Press + or - until “Enable” displays.
7. Press ↵ to select the “Enable” option. An asterisk (*) appears next to
“Enable.”
8. Press
..
.
until “MEDIA CONTROL” displays.
9. Press ↓ until “Media Handling” displays.
10. Press + or - until “Cut” displays.
11. Press ↵ to select “Cut.” An asterisk (*) displays next to “Cut.”
12. Press ↓ until “Cutter Type” displays.
13. Press + or - until “Standard” displays.
14. Press ↵ to select “Standard.” An asterisk (*) displays next to “Standard.”
15. Relock the ↵ key by pressing ↓ and ↵ at the same time, then press
PAUSE to put the printer back online.
16. If the bar code validator is installed, adjust the validator beam. (Refer to
“VALIDATOR” on page 84.)
17. Make sure any media sticking out of the platen goes in the cutter entrance
slot.
18. Test the printer cutting operation and print quality by selecting the
Diagnostics → Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns.
(Refer to “DIAGNOSTICS” on page 200.)
19. To save the configuration parameters, refer to “Saving A Configuration”
on page 72.
285
Appendix D
Prepare The Printer
Installing The Heavy-Duty Cutter
RJ-11 Receptacle
RJ-11 Connector
Lower Support Assembly
Cutter Assembly
Mounting Bracket
Metal Tab (2)
Magnetic Catch (2)
Cutter Assembly
Screw (2)
Figure 3. Heavy-Duty Cutter Assembly
1. Plug the RJ-11 connector into the RJ-11 receptacle.
2. Pull the metal tabs from the magnetic catches and swing open the cutter
assembly mounting bracket from the cutter assembly.
3. Place the cutter assembly in position.
4. Install the two screws using the appropriate metric hex key.
5. Place the cutter assembly into the up (closed) position.
NOTE: The printer cannot detect the presence of the cutter unless the cutter
is in the up (closed) position and the cutter top cover is installed when
the printer is powered on.
Restore The Printer To Operation
1. Set the printer power switch to | (ON).
2. Press
..
.
to place the printer in Menu Mode.
3. Press the ↓ and ↵ keys at the same time until “ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED” appears on the printer display.
286
Restore The Printer To Operation
4. Press
..
.
until “PRINTER CONTROL” displays.
5. Press ↑ until “Advanced User” displays.
6. Press + or - until “Enable” displays.
7. Press ↵ to select the “Enable” option. An asterisk (*) appears next to
“Enable.”
8. Press
..
.
until “MEDIA CONTROL” displays.
9. Press ↓ until “Media Handling” displays.
10. Press + or - until the “Cut” option displays.
11. Press ↵ to select “Cut.” An asterisk (*) displays next to “Cut.”
12. Press ↓ until “Cutter Type” displays.
13. Press + or - until “Heavy-Duty” displays.
14. Press ↵ to select “Heavy-Duty.” An asterisk (*) displays next to
“Heavy-Duty.”
15. Relock the ↵ key by pressing ↓ and ↵ at the same time, then press
PAUSE to put the printer back online.
16. If the bar code validator is installed, adjust the validator beam. (Refer to
“VALIDATOR” on page 84.)
17. Make sure any media sticking out of the platen goes in the cutter entrance
slot.
18. Test the printer cutting operation and print quality by selecting the
Diagnostics → Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns.
(Refer to “DIAGNOSTICS” on page 200.)
19. To save the configuration parameters, refer to “Saving A Configuration”
on page 72.
Removing The Media Cutter
1. Set the printer power to O (OFF).
2. Pull the cutter assembly to the down (open) position.
3. Using the appropriate metric hex key, remove the two screws securing
the cutter bracket to the lower support assembly.
4. Unplug the RJ-11 connector from the RJ-11 receptacle.
5. Remove the media cutter from the printer.
6. Install the front door assembly on the printer lower support assembly.
287
Appendix D
288
Removing The Media Cutter
E
Media Cutter Tray
Installation
Assembling The Media Cutter Tray
Slots
Cutter Tray
Bin
Flanges (4)
Cutter Tray
Base
Figure 1. Attaching the Cutter Tray Bin to the Cutter Tray Base
1. Align the flanges of the cutter tray bin with the slots in the cutter tray base.
2. Push the flanges into the slots, then push the cutter tray bin downward to
secure it.
3. Attach the cutter tray bin in a position so that the labels will not interfere
with cutter operation. (For longer labels, attach the cutter tray bin to a
lower position; for shorter labels, attach it to a higher position.)
289
Appendix E
Installing The Media Cutter Tray
Installing The Media Cutter Tray
Figure 2. Placing the Media Tray Cutter in Position
1. Position the output area of the printer adjacent to the edge of the
supporting table or stand.
2. Open the media cover and slide the lip of the media cutter tray over the lip
of the printer base pan.
290
Figure 3. Installing the Media Cutter Tray
3. Rotate the media cutter tray into position with the tray resting against the
table.
4. Close the media cover.
291
Appendix E
292
Installing The Media Cutter Tray
F
Glossary
Baud (rate)
Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can
be transmitted between the printer and the computer
in one second. For example, one baud equals one bit
per second in a series of binary signals. Both the
printer and the computer must be configured to the
same baud rate.
BIT
Binary digIT. A digit in the binary number system,
represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is the smallest unit of
storage in a digital computer.
Boot-up
The start-up procedure which causes a computer
operating system to be loaded into main memory.
Buffer
An area of storage into which data are read or written
temporarily during data transfers.
Coax
Coaxial cable. A type of cable with a single wire
surrounded by insulation and a braided shield.
Configuration
Refers to the operating properties that define how the
printer responds to signals and commands received
from the host computer at the printer interface. These
properties are called configuration parameters and
are set to match the operating characteristics of the
host computer system.
Continuous Media
Media comprised of one continuous length without a
gap, notch, hole or black mark to establish a
predetermined label or tag length. With this media
type, the Host Form Length or user selected Label
Length sets the desired length of each label.
Continuous Media
Handling Mode
Controller
A media handling mode that advances media in the
forward direction only.
An independent functional logic unit in a data
processing system that controls data paths between
one or more units of peripheral equipment.
293
Appendix F
Data Bits
Binary information sent to the printer; a character set
grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation
marks to be printed.
Default
A value, parameter, attribute, or option that is
assigned by a program or system when another has
not been specified by the user.
Diagnostic
Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer
malfunction or mistake.
Direct Thermal
Media
Direct Thermal
Printing
294
Media coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye and binder. In Direct
Thermal mode the heat from the selected rectangular
elements in the thermal printhead makes direct
contact with the media (no ribbon is used) and
causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on
the media.
A printing method in which no ribbon is used to
transfer data from the printhead to the media to
create an image. The thermal printhead selectively
heats small rectangular elements which make direct
contact with the coated media.
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory. Can be read
from or written to at any time. DRAM is volatile:
Whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned
off.
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory.
Programs, instructions, and routines permanently
stored in the printer that cannot be written to. Files in
EPROM are not lost when power is turned off.
(Resident fonts are fonts permanently stored in
EPROM and available at any time, via software
commands.)
Fanfold Media
Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll
format.
Flash Memory
Nonvolatile memory. See Nonvolatile Memory.
Font
A collection of printing characteristics for printing
alphanumeric characters, all of which combine to
produce a distinctive style of print.
Host Computer
The computer that stores, processes, and sends
data to be printed, which communicates directly with
the printer. The term “host” is used to indicate the
controlling computer, since modern printers are
themselves microprocessor-controlled computer
systems.
Interface
The hardware component used to link two devices by
common physical interconnection, signal, and
functional characteristics.
IPS
The speed at which the media is printed based on a
rate of Inches-Per-Second.
Label Liner (backing) The material labels are attached to during their
manufacturing process. Attachment is usually
accomplished with an adhesive. After printing, labels
can be easily removed from the liner and the liner
discarded or recycled.
Label Taken Sensor
A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect
the presence of a label extended out the front of the
printer. The sensor is used only during Peel-Off and
Tear-Off Media Handling to sense a label and then
detect its removal prior to printing the next label.
Media
Material onto which data is printed by the printer. The
types of media supported by the printer are die-cut
labels or tag stock, supplied in roll or fanfold format.
Media is further described by the type of sensing
used to detect the Top of Form position based on the
label length indicators used. Transmissive (Gap)
media uses a liner gap, notch, or hole between
labels, and Reflective (Mark) media uses a horizontal
black mark located on the underside of the tag stock
or label liner. Continuous media (with no label length
indicators) uses no sensing method and the operator
determines which label length is desired.
Media Sensor
The sensor used to detect the presence of media in
the paper path, as well as, the gap, notch, or hole
position of Transmissive media or the horizontal
black mark on Reflective media.
Memory
See RAM, Nonvolatile Memory, DRAM, and Flash
Memory.
295
Appendix F
296
Nonvolatile Memory
Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be
preserved when the printer is turned off, such as
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.
Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is
housed on the controller board, which contains an
independent, battery-operated power supply. When
printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the
power needed to keep stored data active. Nonvolatile
memory also includes storage in disk.
NOVRAM
Acronym of Nonvolatile Random-Access Memory.
See Nonvolatile Memory.
Parity (check)
Parity checking is the addition of a non-data bit to
data, resulting in the number of “1 bits” being either
always even or always odd. Parity is used to detect
transmission errors. Parity represents value in the
check digit of the received or transmitted data.
PCBA
Printed Circuit Board Assembly. A PCB with
components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc.)
installed.
Port
A data channel used for receiving data from or
transmitting data to one or more external devices.
Protocol
The rules and conventions that govern
communication between a printer and a host
computer. A protocol includes codes for printing text
and graphics and codes instructing the printer to
perform special operations.
RAM
Random-Access Memory. Also called "main
memory" or "working memory". It is the active
memory of the printer, into which programs are
loaded. RAM is saved to volatile memory because
data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or
interrupted.
Resolution
A measure expressing the number of component
units in a given range used to create an image; in
printing, expressed as the number of dots per inch
(dpi) horizontally and vertically.
Roll Media
Media supplied in a roll format, usually wound on a
1 inch or 3 inch cardboard core. The T5000 media
hanger assembly accepts both core sizes.
Sensed Distance
Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical length of one label plus the
length of one gap.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical distance from the leading edge
of one black mark to the leading edge of the next.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable: Not applicable. If
Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Disable, the Sensed
Distance value will not be updated.
Slew
Vertical paper movement.
Stop Bits
The signal which indicates the end of a character or
element.
Thermal Transfer
Media
Thermal Transfer
Printing
Twinax
Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for
image transfer. In Thermal Transfer mode,
compatibility between the ribbon and the media is
critical in producing a high quality long lasting image.
A printing method in which the printhead presses a
specially coated ribbon against the media. The
printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond
the image to the media.
Twinaxial. A type of cable with two wires surrounded
by insulation and a braided shield.
297
Appendix F
298
Index
Symbols
Append Rotated, 158
ASCII Data Port option, 221
^Dnn Dot Slew, 156
Auto Calibrate, 109
Numerics
06 HOST REQUEST fault message, 266
08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT fault message, 266
1284 parallel interface, 235
15 COMM CHECK fault message, 266
20 CPI Condensed, 156
203 DPI fault message, 267
22 INVALID ADDR fault message, 266
27 CU TIMED OUT fault message, 266
28 CU NOT ENAB fault message, 267
300 DPI fault message, 267
33 HEAD OPEN Timeout fault message, 267
40V POWER FAIL fault message, 267
5225 World Trade, 156
A
Auto Calibrate, running, 63
Auto FF at ^PN, 158
Auto Label Width, 103
Auto LF (P-Series, P-Series XQ), 158
Auto LF (Serial Matrix, Proprinter XL,
Epson FX), 158
Auto Locking, 121
Auto Map Select, 101
Auto Report, 86
Auto Skip at End, 159
Auto switching, 233
Auto Uppercase, 159
Autoeject (PGL), 159
Autoeject (VGL), 159
Autowrap, 159
Average BWD, 86
B
Absorb After ^PN, 156
Absorb After ^PY, 157
Accessories, 277
ACK / NAK, 210
Acoustic noise levels, 274
Active Char Set, 157
Active IGP Emul, 117
Advanced User, 120
AI 00 Spaces, 157
Alarm, 119
Alarm, printer, 256
Alt. Char Set, 157
Alt. Set 80-9F (Coax, Twinax), 158
Alt. Set 80-9F (P-Series, Serial Matrix,
Epson FX), 157
BAD VFU CHANNEL fault message, 257
BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format fault
message, 257
BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small fault
message, 257
Barcode Errors, 160
Barcode var., 160
Batch Counter, 123
Batch Rewind mode, 49
Baud Rate, 209
Beam Shift, 90
Bold, 160
Bold Chars., 123
Bottom Margin, 160
299
Btm Margin Ctl, 160
Character Group (Epson FX), 162
BUFFER OVERFLOW fault message, 257
Character Group (PGL), 164
BUFFER OVERRUN fault message, 257
Character Group (Proprinter XL), 165
Buffer Print, 161
Character Group (P-Series, Serial Matrix), 163
Buffer Reprint, 161
Character Group (VGL), 166
Buffer Size in K (Parallel Port), 205
Character Set, 167
Buffer Size in K (Serial), 211
Cleaning, 67
Busy on Strobe, 207
Clear Data, 86
Busy signal, Centronics parallel interface, 235
Clear Error Log, 202
Byte mode, 236
Clear To Send (CTS) signal, RS-232 serial
C
interface, 239
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH fault
C/T PORT
message, 257
Menu, 216
Clip Page, 106
Submenus, 216
Cmd Resolution, 167
Cable length
COAX SETUP Menu, 128
Centronics parallel interface, 234
Coax Type, 167
IEEE 1284 parallel, 237
Coax/twinax host interface, 276
RS-232 interface, 239
Code Page Subset, 167
RS-422 interface, 239
Communication
serial, 239
Cal in Peel Mode option, 113
CALIBRATE CTRL
Centronics parallel, 234
Dataproducts Long Lines, 234
IEEE 1284 parallel (bidirectional), 235
Menu, 108
Compatibility, 120
Submenus, 109
Compatibility Mode
CALIBRATION Warning fault message, 257
IEEE 1284 interface, 235
Cancel IGP/DCU, 161
Compressed Print, 167
Cancel Key, 120
CONFIG. CONTROL
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off fault
Menu, 91
message, 257
Submenus, 92
Centronics
acknowledge signal, 235
busy signal, 235
data lines 1 through 8 signals, 235
data strobe signal, 235
Configuration
menu overview, 78
Configuration menu
moving within, 70
moving within (ill.), 70
interface signals, 235
Configuration printout, 76
online signal, 235
Configurations
Paper Empty signal, 235
modifying saved, 74
Paper Instruction (PI) signal, 235
printing, 75
parallel interface, 234
printout (sample), 76
pin assignments, 234
saving, 72
Change Case, 161
Changing printer settings, 71
300
specifying power-up, 73
Configuring the printer, 69
CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media fault
Define LF code (PGL, Serial Matrix, Proprinter XL,
message, 258
Epson FX), 169
Control Code 06, 167
Define LF code (P-Series, P-Series XQ), 170
Control Code 08, 167
Del Char frm Flsh, 118
Control panel, 29
Del Char frm RAM, 118
Control panel keys, 31
Del Set frm Flsh, 118
Controlling print quality, 244
Del Set from RAM, 119
Controls, 29
Delete Config, 92
Copy Count, 168
Delete Files, 120
CR at MPP+1, 168
Device Address, 216
CR Edit, 168
DHCP option, 222
CR, EM, & NL, 168
DIAGNOSTICS
Create and send download file - offline, 232
Menu, 200
Create and send download file - online (PGL
Submenus, 201
only), 232
Diagnostics, 241
CSC, 17
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED fault message, 258
CTHI, 276
Direct thermal printing, 22
CTHI Emulation, 116
Display indicators, 30
Customer Solutions Center, 17
Display Language, 118
Customer support, 17
Display Ribbon, 106
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter fault message, 258
Do FF at TOF, 170
Cutter Type option, 107
DO NOT POWER OFF fault message, 258
D
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash
Memory, 229
Data Bit 8, 168, 205
Downloading software, 223, 227
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, RS-232 serial
Downloading true type fonts, 232
interface, 239
DRAM Installed, 202
Data exchange, 242
DTR, 211
Data lines 1 through 8 signal, Centronics parallel
Dynamic print control, 22
interface, 235
E
Data Polarity, 207
Data Protocol, 210
Early Print Cmpl (Coax), 170
Data Set Ready (DSR) signal, RS-232 serial
Early Print Comp (IPDS), 170
interface, 239
EC SOFTWARE FAIL fault message, 258
Data strobe signal, Centronics parallel
Elong./Alt. Font, 171
interface, 235
Emulation, 171
Data Term Ready, 212
Emulation Submenus, 156
Decodeability, 88
Emulations Overview, 124
Default Code Pag, 169
E-NET INIT fault message, 258
Default Font, 169
E-NET READY fault message, 258
Defects, 88
E-NET RESET fault message, 258
Define CR code, 169
Environmental information, 274
EPSON FX SETUP Menu, 154
301
Epson Set, 171
Extended Subset, 173
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID fault
Extra Bold Char., 123
F
message, 258
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX fault
message, 258
F/W Revision, 89
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM fault
Fanfold media, 41
message, 258
Fault, 235
ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head fault
Fault message
message, 259
06 HOST REQUEST, 266
Error Markers, 171
08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT, 266
Error Msgs, 171
15 COMM CHECK, 266
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED fault
203 DPI, 267
message, 259
22 INVALID ADDR, 266
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES fault
27 CU TIMED OUT, 266
message, 260
28 CU NOT ENAB, 267
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM fault
300 DPI, 267
message, 259
33 HEAD OPEN Timeout, 267
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH fault
40V POWER FAIL, 267
message, 259
BAD VFU CHANNEL, 257
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE fault
BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format, 257
message, 259
BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small, 257
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID fault
BUFFER OVERFLOW, 257
message, 259
BUFFER OVERRUN, 257
Error Recover, 106
CALIBRATION Warning, 257
Error Report, 172
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off, 257
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED fault
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 257
message, 259
CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media, 258
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX fault
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 258
message, 259
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 258
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH fault message, 259
DO NOT POWER OFF, 258
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM fault message, 259
EC SOFTWARE FAIL, 258
ESC d command, 172
E-NET INIT, 258
ETHERNET PARAMS
E-NET READY, 258
Menu, 218
E-NET RESET, 258
Submenus, 220
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 258
Ethernet Speed option, 222
ETX / ACK, 210
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS
XXXXXXXX, 258
EVFU Select, 172
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 258
Exchange, data, 242
ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head, 259
Expanded Font (PGL), 172
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 259
Expanded Font (VGL), 173
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING
Expanded Fonts option (IPDS), 173
Ext Execute Copy, 173
302
QUEUES, 260
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
DRAM, 259
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
FLASH, 259
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 264
RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon, 264
RIBBON DETECTED In Direct Mode, 265
RIBBON FAULT Timeout, 265
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 259
Ribbon Low, 265
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 259
RIBBON OUT Load Ribbon, 265
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 265
DETECTED, 259
SIGNAL Clipping, 265
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 259
SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power, 265
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 259
Speed Exceeds Validator Limit, 266
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 259
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT, 266
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 260
Unscannable Code Check media, 266
FILE SYS INVALID Optimize&Reboot, 260
Fault Message Troubleshooting Table, 257
FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash, 260
Fault messages, 256
FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash, 260
Fault Message Troubleshooting Table, 257
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 260
operator-correctable, 256
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 260
requiring field service attention, 256
FRAMING ERROR, 260
Fault mode, 33
GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual, 260
FF After Job, 174
GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE, 261
FF valid at TOF, 174
Half Speed Mode, 261
FF Validity, 174
HEAD POWER FAIL, 261
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite fault message, 260
IGP/PGL ERROR, 261
FILE SYS INVALID Optimize&Reboot fault
INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot/Add RAM, 261
message, 260
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 261
FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash fault message, 260
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 261
FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash fault message, 260
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 262
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files fault
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 262
message, 260
PAPER OUT Load Paper, 262
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot fault
PAPER OUT TIMEOUT, 263
message, 260
PARITY ERROR, 263
Font download utility, 232
POOR SCANNING Check Head&Heat, 263
Fonts, 20
POOR SCANNING Check media, 263
Downloading, 229
POOR SCANNING Inspect head, 263
downloading true type fonts, 232
POWER SAVER MODE, 263
Form Length (lines), 175
PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual, 263
Form Spacing, 89
PRINT HEAD HOT, 263
Form Width (char.), 175
PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head, 263
Form Width (in.), 175
PRINTER HOT, 264
Form Width (mm.), 175
PWR SUPPLY HOT, 264
Format Control, 175
RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn, 264
Forms Length (in.), 174
Remove Label, 264
Forms Length (mm), 175
RESETTING PLEASE WAIT, 264
FRAMING ERROR fault message, 260
303
I
Framing Errors, 215
G
I-2/5 Selection, 179
Gap Length option, 112
I2of5 Checksum, 90
GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual fault
Idle Response, 213
message, 260
IEEE 1284
Gap Windowing option, 112
interface, 235
Gap/Mark Sensor, 109
operating modes, 235
Gap/Mark Thresh, 110
Ignore Ch#1, 179
Gateway Addess option, 220
Ignore Ch#2, 180
General cleaning, 67
Ignore Chars, 180
Glob Mem Adjust, 122
Ignore Dots, 180
Good Barcodes, 86
Ignore Mode, 180
Good Forms, 86
Ignore Spaces, 180
Gothic Typeface, 176
Ignore Text, 181
Graphic Chek Cod, 176
IGP/PGL ERROR fault message, 261
Graphic Chek Err, 176
IGP/PGL SETUP Menu, 140
GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE fault
IGP/VGL SETUP Menu, 142
message, 261
IGP100 Compatibl., 181
H
Image Buf Size, 216
Improving processing time, 242
Half Speed Mode fault message, 261
Indicators, 29
Handshaking, 242
Indicators and switches, 272
hardware, 242
Installing the media guide, 50
software, 242
INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot/Add RAM fault
Hardware options, 275
message, 261
Head On Time, 202
Interface options, 276
HEAD POWER FAIL fault message, 261
Interfaces, 233
Head Print Dist, 202
Centronics parallel, 234
Head Type, 203
Dataproducts Long Lines, 234
Head Voltage, 203
IEEE 1284, 235
Hex Dump Mode, 202
Interfacing, 243
Hexdump mode, 176
Internal label rewinder, 20
Hor Image Shift, 99
Internal rewinder, 49, 275
Horizontal DPI, 177
Intervention Req, 181
Host Command, 178
IPDS Data Port option, 221
Host Form Length (IPDS), 178
IPDS for use with PrintNet 10/100 Base-T (UTP
Host Form Length (PGL), 178
Ethernet) and Twinax Host Interface, 276
Host Forms Length (VGL), 178
IPDS for use with PrintNet 10/100 Base-T (UTP
Host Interface, 117
Ethernet) Interface, 276
Host interface characteristics, 273
IPDS for use with Twinax Host Interface, 276
Host Override, 179
IPDS SETUP Menu, 136
Host PI, 179
Italic Print, 181
304
J
Manual Calibrate, 111
Manual conventions, 18
Job Control option, 222
Max Cache Memory, 122
Job In Process indicator, 29
Max Cached Char, 122
K
Keep Alive Timer option, 221
L
Max PI 16, 183
Max. Print Width, 183
Media, 23, 278
fanfold, 41
Label Length, 97
loading, 34
Label Peel-Off, 55
Printronix, 278
roll, 35
Label Width, 98
Labels, printing test, 241
MEDIA CONTROL
LAC Approx., 181
Menu, 94
LAC Option, 181
Submenus, 96
Media cutter, 20, 275, 283
Last BWD, 87
installing, 283
Last Char = FF, 182
Media cutter tray, 20, 275, 289
Latch Data On, 207
installing, 289
LCD, 29
LCD Fault Message Troubleshooting Table, 257
Media dimensions, 271
Ld Char at PwrUp, 118
Media guide
Ld Char from Fls, 118
installing, 50
Ld Set at PwrUp, 119
removing, 48
Ld Set from Flsh, 118
Media Handling, 96
Lead-in Chars, 182
Media handling modes, 33
Left Margin, 182
continuous, 33
Limited software product warranty, 4
cut, 34
Liquid Crystal Display, 29
peel-off, 34
Load Config., 92
tear-off, 33
Loading media, 34
tear-off strip, 33
fanfold, 41
Media Profile, 110
roll, 35
Media profile, 64
LOADING PROGRAM, 261
Media sensor, 61
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX% fault
calibrating, 63
message, 261
disable, 62
Loading ribbon, 34, 45
gap, 62
Logical Buf Size, 182
mark, 62
LP+ Emulation, 116
positioning, 61
LPI, 183
sensing different media types, 62
M
Media specifications matrix, 271
Media, general information, 270
MAC Address, 223
Memory expansion, 275
MAC Address option, 220
Memory expansion (for non-IPDS printers only), 20
Main Menu, 79
Memory specifications, 272
305
Options
Menu mode, 33
Menu options, selecting, 71
fonts, 20
Menu overview, 78
hardware, 275
Midline PY (includes ^PN), 183
internal label rewinder, 20
Min. Code Height, 89
internal rewinder, 275
Modifying saved configurations, 74
IPDS, 21
N
media cutter, 20, 275
media cutter tray, 20, 275
Name Config (1-8), 93
memory expansion, 275
Nest Serv Type option, 221
memory expansion (for non-IPDS printers
NetBIOS Protocol option, 221
only), 20
Network Interface Card, 20
Network Interface Card, 20
Network Interface Card (NIC), 276
NIC, 20
Nibble mode, 236
online barcode validator, 21, 275
NL at MPP+1, 183
printer, 275
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED fault
TN5250, 21
message, 262
twinax/coax host interface, 20
Novell Frame option, 221
Orientation, 99
Novell Protocol option, 221
Overstrike, 184
Null Handling, 183
Overstrike Forms, 86
Null Suppression (Coax), 184
Overstrike Style, 89
Null Suppression (IPDS), 184
Overwrite Files, 119
Num Auto Labels, 104
P
Num Retry option, 90
Number of Codes, 87
PA1, 185
O
PA2, 185
Page Rotation, 185
Offline mode, 33
Paper Empty (PE) signal, Centronics parallel
Offpage Errors, 184
interface, 235
One Char Enquiry, 214
Paper Feed Shift, 97
Online Auto-Cal option, 112
Paper Instruction (PI) signal, Centronics
Online barcode validator, 21
interface, 235
Online data validator, 275
PAPER OUT Load Paper fault message, 262
Online mode, 33
Paper Out Thresh, 110
Online signal, Centronics parallel interface, 235
PAPER OUT TIMEOUT fault message, 263
Online Status indicator, 29
Parallel interfaces, Centronics, 234
On-site maintenance service, 9
PARALLEL PORT
Operating modes, 33
Optimize&Reboot, 120
Menu, 204
Submenus, 205
Optimized Ratio, 184
Parity, 209
OPTION NOT INSTALLED fault message, 262
PARITY ERROR fault message, 263
Optional features, 20
Percent Decode, 88
Optional host interfaces, 233
PGL, 125
306
PGL Normal, 185
PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head fault
Physical dimensions, 274
message, 263
PI Ignored, 205
Print Intensity, 96
PI Slew Range, 185
Print Mode, 96
Pin assignments, Centronics parallel interface, 234
Print quality, 244
Poll Character, 213
Print Speed, 96
Poll Response, 213
Printer
POOR SCANNING Check Head&Heat fault
alarms, 256
message, 263
dynamic print control, 22
POOR SCANNING Inspect head fault
installation, 26
message, 263
interfaces, 233
POR, 216
problems, 249
Port Type (C/T Port), 216
problems and solutions, 249
Port Type (Parallel Port), 205
self-test, 241
Port Type (Serial), 209
set-up, 24
Position Aft FF, 185
the printing process, 22
Positioning the media sensor, 61
Power consumption, 273
Power on IGP/PGL, 186
PRINTER CONTROL
Menu, 114
Submenus, 116
Power On Reset, 216
PRINTER HOT fault message, 264
POWER SAVER MODE fault message, 263
Printer installation, 26
Power Saver Time, 118
Printer model specifications, 19
Power source and grounding, 273
Printer options, 275
Power switch, 29
Printer PI, 187
Powering on the printer, 33
Printer Select, 187
Power-on, 33
Printer settings, changing, 71
Power-up ^F, 186
Printer Status, 214
Power-up ^PY, 186
Printer Tests, 201
Power-up ^X, 186
Printer warranty, 9
Power-Up Config., 92
Printhead
Power-up State, 119
cleaning, 67
Pre-Peel Adjust, 105
pressure adjustment, 59
Pre-Peel Mode, 105
pressure block adjustments, 60
Primary Subset, 186
Printhead pressure adjustment, 59
Prime Signal (Parallel Port), 206
Printhead pressure block adjustments, 60
Print Char. Set, 187
Printing a configuration, 75
Print Config., 92
Printing adjustments, 59
Print Direction, 104
Printing specifications, 269
Print Error Log, 202
Printing test labels, 241
Print File List, 120
Printronix media, 278
PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual fault
Printronix windows driver, 232
message, 263
Processing time, improving, 242
PRINT HEAD HOT fault message, 263
Prop Line Length, 187
307
Ribbon, 23
Prop. Spacing, 187
PROPRINTER SETUP Menu, 152
loading, 34, 45
Protect Configs., 92
Printronix, 277
P-SER XQ SETUP Menu, 148
Ribbon 8300, 277
PSeries Dbl High, 188
Ribbon 8500, 277
P-SERIES SETUP Menu, 145
Ribbon 8550, 277
Ptr Media Dist, 202
Ribbon 8600, 277
Ptr On Time, 202
Ribbon 8630, 277
Ptx Setup Parse, 121
Ribbon 8700, 278
Ptx Setup SFCC, 119
Ribbon 8725, 278
Pwr Save Control option, 118
ribbon specifications, 272
PWR SUPPLY HOT fault message, 264
RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon fault
Pwr Up Auto-Cal, 111
message, 264
Q
RIBBON DETECTED In Direct Mode fault
message, 265
Quiet Zones, 88
RIBBON FAULT Timeout fault message, 265
R
RAM Disk Size, 121
Rbn Takeup Full, 107
RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn fault
message, 264
Received Data (RD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 239
RS-422 serial interface, 240
Remove Label fault message, 264
Removing media from the rewinder, 54
Removing the media guide, 48
Repeat Form Opt, 188
Report Status (C/T Port), 217
Report Status (Parallel Port), 206
Report Status (Serial), 212
Request to Send, 213
Request To Send (RTS) signal, RS-232 serial
interface, 239
Reset Cfg Names, 93
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 188
Ribbon Low, 107
Ribbon Low fault message, 265
RIBBON OUT Load Ribbon fault message, 265
Ribbon specifications, 272
Ribbon Width, 106
Right Margin, 188
Roll media, 35
Rot. Char Size, 189
RS-232 serial interface
Clear To Send (CTS), 239
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 239
Data Set Ready (DSR), 239
Received Data (RD), 239
Request To Send (RTS), 239
Transmitted Data (TD), 239
RS-422 serial interface
received data (RD), 240
transmitted data (TD), 240
Running auto calibrate, 63
Running media profile, 64
S
Reset Head Data, 203
RESETTING PLEASE WAIT fault message, 264
Save Char to Fls, 118
Resistors, configuration, 238
Save Config., 92
Resp. Polarity, 207
Save Set to Flsh, 119
RESTORING BOOT CODE fault message, 264
Saving new configurations, 72
Rewinder, 275
Scalable Size, 189
removing printed media from, 54
308
Scanner Settings, 89
SPC COAX SETUP Menu, 134
SCS Buffer Cntrl, 189
SPC Null Supp, 192
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION fault message, 265
SPC TWINAX SETUP Menu, 135
Select Char, 189
SPC Type (SPC Coax Setup), 193
Select CPI, 189
SPC Type (SPC Twinax Setup), 193
Select LPI, 189
Specifications, 269
Select SFCC (PGL), 190
acoustic noise levels, 274
Select SFCC (P-Series), 190
environmental information, 274
Select SO Char, 190
host interface, 273
Selecting a menu option, 71
indicators and switches, 272
Self-test, printer, 241
media, 270
Sensed Distance, 110
media dimensions, 271
SER MATRIX SETUP Menu, 150
memory, 272
SERIAL PORT
physical dimensions, 274
Menu, 208
power, 273
Submenus, 209
power consumption, 273
Series1 1 Char, 210
printer model, 19
Series1 2 Char, 211
printing, 269
Set Label Length, 107
ribbon, 272
Set Lock Key, 121
Specifying a power-up configuration, 73
Set Text Orientn, 191
Speed Exceeds Validator Limit fault message, 266
Setting printer configuration parameters, 69
Standard C/T Interface, 124
Setting up the printer, 24
Standard Chars., 123
SFCC, 191
Standard features, 19
SFCC Char (SPC Coax, SPC Twinax), 191
Standard host interfaces, 233
SFCC d command, 191
Standard Sets, 193
SIGNAL Clipping fault message, 265
Status and Display Indicators matrix, 30
Signals, Centronics parallel interface, 235
Status indicators, 30
Simple Protocol Converter, 116, 125
Stop Bits, 209
Skip Cmd Prefix, 191
Subnet Mask option, 220
Skip Labels, 89
Supplies information, 9
Slash 0, 192
Symbol Contrast, 88
T
Slashed Zero, 192
Slew Relative, 192
Slew Speed, 104
Tear-Strip Time, 105
Software Build, 202
Technical support, 17
SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power fault
Telemetry Data, 87
message, 265
Telemetry Path, 87
Software handshaking, 242
Terminating resistor configuration, 238
Software, downloading, 223, 227
Test Count, 201
Solving printer problems, 249
Test labels, printing, 241
SPC, 125
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT fault
SPC Char Set, 192
message, 266
309
Text Length, 193
Twinax Type, 195
Text Position, 194
Twinax/coax host interface, 20
Thermal consumables, 23
Typeface, 196
U
Thermal Printer Series Product Line, 19
Thermal printer technology, 22
Thermal transfer printing, 22
Uniform Fonts, 196
Thermal transfer ribbons, 277
Units, 107
Time processing, improving, 242
Unpacking the printer, 24
Timeout (C/T Port), 217
Unscannable Code Check media fault
Timeout (Parallel Port), 206
message, 266
Timeout (Serial), 212
UPC Descenders (PGL), 196
TN5250, 21
UPC Descenders (VGL), 196
TN5250 SETUP menu, 138
Upr. Case Select, 197
Top Margin, 194
User-Def Ratio, 197
Training classes for T5000, 17
Using downloaded true type fonts, 232
Translate Table, 194
Using the internal rewinder, 49
V
Translation Tbl (Coax), 194
Translation Tbl (SPC Coax), 195
Translation Tbl (SPC Twinax), 195
Translation Tbl option (Twinax, TN5250), 195
Transmitted Data (TD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 239
RS-422 serial interface, 240
Trickle Time (Parallel Port), 206
Trickle Time (Serial), 212
Troubleshooting, 241
control panel, 249
Fault Message Troubleshooting Table, 257
fault messages, 256
LCD Messages, 257
power failures, 250
VALIDATOR
Menu, 84
Submenus, 86
Validator Action, 88
Validator Funct., 87
Validator Report, 86
Var Form Adjust, 197
Var Form Type option, 197
Ver Image Shift, 99
Vertical DPI, 197
VGL, 126
View File List, 119
VPA Check, 198
W
print quality, 250
printer operation, 254
Warranty information, 9
printer problems and solutions, 249
Width Limit, 198
ribbon, 255
Word Length, 209
True Vert 1/10, 195
X
Truncate Alpha, 195
TWINAX SETUP Menu, 131
310
XON / XOFF, 210
PRINTRONIX, Inc.
14600 MYFORD ROAD
P.O. Box 19559
IRVINE, CA 92623-9559
PHONE: 714-368-2300
FAX: 714-368-2600
PRINTRONIX
NEDERLAND BV
P.O. BOX 163, NIEUWEWEG 283
NL-6600 AD WIJCHEN
THE NETHERLANDS
PHONE: 31-24-6489489
FAX: 31-24-6489499
PRINTRONIX Schweiz GmbH
42 CHANGI SOUTH STREET 1
CHANGI SOUTH INDUSTRIAL ESTATE
SINGAPORE 486763
PHONE: 65-542-0110
FAX: 65-543-0220
Visit our website at:
http://www.printronix.com
750926-001G
*750926-001*